Yamaha RX-530 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-530

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

RX-V530RDS

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

V874610

RX-V530RDS

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

RX-V530RDS

AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

0100V530(GB)-cv1/4 1/18/02, 8:44 PM1

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the

left and right, and 10 cm at the back of this unit

— away from direct sunlight, heat sources,

vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical

shock, do not place this unit where it may get

exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.

Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this

unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room

with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside

this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

–

Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may

cause electrical shock to the user and/or

damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper,

tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct

heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit

rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or

personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than

specified is dangerous and may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any

damage resulting from use of this unit with a

voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an

electrical storm.

14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects

and/or liquid drops inside this unit.

15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

16 When not planning to use this unit for long

periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC

power plug from the wall outlet.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding

that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the

AC power plug from the wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models

only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local main voltage

BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,

even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called

the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

■ For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the

plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and

an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the

instructions described below.

Note

• The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a

plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live

socket outlet.

■ Special Instructions for U.K.

Model

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED

IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING

CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this

apparatus may not correspond with the coloured

markings identifying the terminals in your plug,

proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected

to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or

coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured

BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is

marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth

terminal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION

0101V530_Cau_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM2

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS ............................................................ 1

FEATURES ............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3

Checking the package contents ................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel ................................................................ 4

Remote control .......................................................... 6

Using the remote control ........................................... 7

Front panel display .................................................... 8

PREPARATION

SPEAKER SETUP ................................................. 9

Speakers .................................................................... 9

Speaker placement .................................................... 9

Connecting the speakers .......................................... 10

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13

Before connecting components ............................... 13

Connecting video components ................................ 14

Connecting audio components ................................ 16

Connecting the antennas ......................................... 17

Connecting an external decoder .............................. 18

Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 18

Turning on the power .............................................. 19

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 20

ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .. 21

Using the test tone ................................................... 21

BASIC OPERATION

BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................ 23

Input modes and indications .................................... 25

Selecting a sound field program .............................. 26

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING

(DSP) ................................................................. 29

Understanding sound fields ..................................... 29

Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 29

CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 30

Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 30

CINEMA-DSP programs ........................................ 32

TUNING ................................................................ 34

Automatic and manual tuning ................................. 34

Presetting stations .................................................... 35

Tuning in to a preset station .................................... 37

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ........................... 38

Description of RDS data ......................................... 38

Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 38

PTY SEEK function ................................................ 39

EON function .......................................................... 39

SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 40

Setting the sleep timer ............................................. 40

Canceling the sleep timer ........................................ 40

RECORDING ....................................................... 41

ADVANCED OPERATION

SET MENU ........................................................... 42

Adjusting the items on the SET MENU .................. 42

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 43

2 LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 45

3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) ................... 45

4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 46

5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and

right speakers) ..................................................... 46

6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 46

7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .............. 46

8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 47

9 DISPLAY SET .................................................... 47

10MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ........................ 47

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 48

Control area ............................................................. 48

Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 49

Clearing setup manufacturer codes ......................... 49

Controlling other components ................................. 50

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT

SPEAKERS ....................................................... 51

ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME ..................... 52

ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS

FOR PRO LOGIC

MUSIC ......................... 53

Changing parameter settings ................................... 53

PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions ....... 53

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 54

GLOSSARY .......................................................... 58

SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 60

0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM1

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

FEATURES

Built-in 5-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Main: 75 W + 75 W

Center: 75 W

Rear: 75 W + 75 W

[Other models]

Main: 65 W + 65 W

Center: 65 W

Rear: 65 W + 65 W

Multi-mode digital sound field

processing

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1

decoder

◆ DTS/DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP

technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital

or DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP

Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner

◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset

editing)

Other features

◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ “SET MENU” for optimizing this unit for your

Audio/Video system

◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance

adjustment

◆ 6-channel external decoder input

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes

■ About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this

manual.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement

in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority.

0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM2

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the

+ and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings

(+ and –) inside the battery compartment.

1 Press the part and slide off the battery

compartment cover.

2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings on

the inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into

place.

■ Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in

the operating range of the remote control, that the

indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline

and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging

carefully as these different types of batteries may have

the same shape and color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them

immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or

letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean

the battery compartment thoroughly before installing

new batteries.

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have

been cleared.

AM loop antenna

(Europe, U.K., Australia and

Singapore models)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China,

Korea and General models)

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Remote control

GETTING STARTED

Checking the package contents

Check your package to make sure it contains the following items.

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna

adapter (U.K. model)

A/V cable (U.S.A., Canada

and Australia models)

0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM3

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

START

EON

RDS MODE/FREQ

MODE

PTY SEEK

EFFECT

1234567

90 e

irt8qyuw

START

EON

RDS MODE/FREQ

MODE

PTY SEEK

po sa

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. When

you turn this unit on, you will hear a click and there will

be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

Standby mode

In this mode, this unit will consume a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared-signals from the

remote control.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

3 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

4 INPUT MODE

Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,

DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is

connected to two or more input jacks. Priority cannot be

set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

5 INPUT l / h

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

6 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.

7 6CH INPUT

Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks. This audio takes priority over the source selected

with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the

remote control).

(U.K. and Europe model)

0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM4

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

8 SILENT (PHONES jack)

Allows you enjoy DSP effect for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the speakers.

9 STEREO/EFFECT

Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect

reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel

signals are directed to the main left and right speakers

without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS

signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the

main left and right speakers.

0 PROGRAM l / h

Selects the DSP program.

q MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores the current station in the memory.

w TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.

e FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

r PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the

colon (:) turns on or off).

This button is also used to exchange the assignment of

two preset stations with each other.

t PRESET/TUNING l / h

Selects preset station numbers 1 to 8 when the colon (:)

appears in the front panel display.

Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not

appear.

y A/B/C/D/E

Selects preset station groups A to E.

u BASS

Adjusts the low-frequency response for the main left and

right channels.

Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the low-

frequency response.

i TREBLE

Adjusts the high-frequency response for the main left and

right channels.

Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the high-

frequency response.

o RDS MODE/FREQ (U.K. and Europe models)

When an RDS station is received, press this button to

change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode,

RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data

service) and/or frequency display mode in turn.

p PTY SEEK MODE (U.K. and Europe models)

Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode.

a PTY SEEK START (U.K. and Europe models)

Press this button to begin searching for a station after the

desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK

mode.

s EON (U.K. and Europe models)

Press this button to select the desired program type

(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to

tune in to a radio program of that type automatically.

0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM5

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Remote control

This section describes the remote control controls and

their functions. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected

before starting operation. See “REMOTE CONTROL

FEATURES” on pages 48 to 50.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 CODE SET

Used when setting up the manufacturer code (see page

49).

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and set the remote control to

operate the selected source component.

4 DSP program

Select DSP programs for the AMP position. Press a

button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that

group.

5 LEVEL

Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted.

6 Multi control section

Used when changing the setting and to implement the

settings.

7 TEST

Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.

8 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

9 STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

0 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

q SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

w 6CH INPUT

Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks.

e AMP

Sets the remote control to the AMP mode for controlling

this unit.

r Å/ı

Sets the remote control to operate other components (not

necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this

unit’s input source.

t VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM6

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

30° 30°

Approximately 6 m (20 feet)

y MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output

to the previous volume level.

u STEREO/EFFECT

Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect

reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel

signals are directed to the main left and right speakers

without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS

signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the

main left and right speakers.

i SET MENU

Selects the SET MENU mode.

Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,

stove or bath;

– dusty places; or

– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.

0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM7

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

LCR

RC RR

LFE

VIRTUAL

DSP

PCM

MATRIX

SILENT

DIGITAL

EON

PS PTY

PTY HOLD

MUTE

SLEEP

STEREO

TUNED

MEMORY

AUTO

PRO LOGIC

VOLUME

DTS

MOVIE

THTR

ENTERTAINMENT

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO

LOGIC

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

1234

5789

qwert y

1 Processor indicators

Lights up when the t, g, VIRTUAL,

PRO LOGIC

DSP

or MATRIX are activated.

2 Input source indicator

Shows the current input source with a cursor.

3 MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on.

4 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

5 v indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

6 SILENT indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected while the

digital sound field processor is on.

7 Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

8 DSP program indicators

The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the

ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE

THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is

selected.

9 Multi-information display

Shows the current DSP program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

0 RDS indicator (U.K. and Europe models)

The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently

received RDS station light(s) up.

EON indicator lights up when an RDS station that offers

the EON data service is being received.

PTY HOLD indicator lights up while searching for

stations in the PTY SEEK mode.

q STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.

w TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned to a station.

e MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored.

r AUTO indicator

Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

t SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

y Input channel indicator

Indicates the channel components of input signals being

received.

Front panel display

(U.K. and Europe models)

0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM8

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

Speakers

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-

field quality with a 5-speaker system, using main left and

right speakers, rear left and right speakers and a center

speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with

different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a

moving human voice and other types of sound may not

shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers

from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same

tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound

plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers

from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are

used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is

for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.).

The main speakers should be high-performance models

and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other

speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For

precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the

models of equivalent performance with the main

speakers.

■ Use of a subwoofer expands your

sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when

playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is

ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.

PREPARATION

Speaker placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the

speakers.

■ Main speakers

Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance between

each speaker and each side of the video monitor should

also be the same.

■ Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front

face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to

the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the

monitor) and centrally between the main speakers.

■ Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position,

facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the

floor.

■ Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better

to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it

slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall

reflections.

Note

• If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear and/or center),

change the settings of SPEAKER SET items at the SET MENU

to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers

to.

CAUTION

Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

Main

speaker (L)

1.8 m (6 feet)

Rear speaker (L)

Rear speaker (R)

Subwoofer

Main speaker (R)Center speaker

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM9

SPEAKER SETUP

Connecting the speakers

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/

or the speakers.

If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers

in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.

■ Speaker cables

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable

together to prevent short circuits.

■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China, Korea and General models)

• Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the

knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of

the corresponding terminal.

■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

A front speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

10 mm (3/8”)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

(U.S.A. model)

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM10

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

SPEAKERS

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT AUDIO

COMPONENT VIDEO

TUNER

ANT

MONITOR

OUT

D-TV

/CBL

DVD

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

VIDEOS VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

S VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

D-TV/CBL

DVD

VCR

OUT

D-TV

/CBL

MD/CD-R

/CD-R

(PLAY)

V-A UX

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MAIN

OUT

(REC)

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OUTPUTAUDIO

MAIN

REAR

(SURROUND)

CENTER

–

L L

R R

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN

: 8Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

: 4Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

Subwoofer

system

Center

speaker

Right

Rear speaker

■ SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or

rear channels are directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-frequency

effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your

SPEAKER SET selections.

Notes

• The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz.

• If you do not use a subwoofer, designate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of SPEAKER SET

item “1D BASS” on the SET MENU to MAIN.

• Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote

control (see “ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 51).

Main speaker

Right Left

Left

The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening

room.

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM11

SPEAKER SETUP

SPEAKERS

MAIN

REAR

(SURROUND)

CENTER

–

L L

R R

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN

: 8Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

: 4Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

Switch

position

Left

Right

Speaker

Main

Center

Rear

Main

Center

Rear

Impedance level

The impedance of each speaker must

be 4 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 6 Ω or

higher.

The impedance of each speaker must

be 6 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must

be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 8 Ω or

higher.

The impedance of each speaker must

be 8 Ω or higher.

(U.S.A. model)

■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

WARNING

Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the power of this unit is on, this may damage

the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch all the way to either position when

this unit is in the standby mode.

Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this

switch only when this unit is in the standby mode.

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM12

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

CAUTION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the

mains power until all connections between the

components have been completed.

• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to

say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to

“–”. Some components require different connection

methods and have different jack names. Refer to the

operation instructions for each component to be

connected to this unit.

• When you connect other YAMAHA audio components

(such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or

changer), connect them to the jack with the same

number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this

labeling system to all its products.

• After you have completed all connections, check them

again to make sure they are correct.

• The name of jack corresponds to input selector.

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of

digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital

and DTS bitstreams. To enjoy multi-channel sound track

of DVD software, etc. with DSP effect, you need to make

digital connection. All digital input jacks are acceptable

for 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

Note

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.

If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this

standard, this unit may not function properly.

SPEAKERS

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT AUDIO

COMPONENT VIDEO

TUNER

ANT

MONITOR

OUT

D-TV

/CBL

DVD

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

VIDEOS VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

S VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

D-TV/CBL

DVD

VCR

OUT

D-TV

/CBL

MD/CD-R

/CD-R

(PLAY)

V-A UX

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MAIN

OUT

(REC)

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OUTPUTAUDIO

MAIN

REAR

(SURROUND)

CENTER

–

L L

R R

DIGITAL INPUT jacks

(pages 13-16)

6CH INPUT jacks

(page 18)

Video component jacks

(pages 14-15)

Audio component jacks

(page 16)

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT jack

(page 11)

AC OUTLETS (page 18)

Antenna input

terminals

(page 17)

SPEAKERS terminals

(pages 10-11)

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack (page 16)

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM13

CONNECTIONS

Connecting video components

Refer to the connection examples on the next page.

■ Types of video jacks

There are three types of video jacks as follows:

1 VIDEO jack

Conventional composite video signal.

2 S VIDEO jack

Transmits color and luminance separately and achives

high-quality color reproduction.

3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit color difference (P

, P

) and

luminance separately and provide the best quality

picture.

• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals

input through the composite video, S-video and

component jacks are only output through the

corresponding composite video, S-video, and

component jacks.

• Use a commercially available cable specified for

connecting each type of jacks.

• The description of the component video jacks may

differ depending on the component (e.g. Y, C

, C

/Y,

, P

/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). When using these jacks, refer

also to the operation instructions for the component

being connected.

■ Connecting a video monitor

Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the

MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack.

Note

• If you connect this unit with a source component using S-video

(or Component video) jacks, you also need to connect your

video monitor using S-video (or Component video) jacks.

■ Connecting a DVD player/digital

TV/cable TV

Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on

your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and

connect the video signal output jack on the component to

the VIDEO jack on this unit.

Then connect AUDIO jacks on your component to the

AUDIO jacks on this unit.

• If your video component has an S-video output or component

video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the

component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component

video signal output jacks on the component to the

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

• The AUDIO jacks are available for a video component which

does not have optical digital output jack. However, multi-

channel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio signals

input from AUDIO jacks.

■ Connecting another video

component

Connect the audio signal output jacks on your video

component to the AUDIO jacks and connect the video

signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack

on this unit.

■ Connecting a VCR or DVR (digital

video recorder)

Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video

component to the AUDIO OUT jacks and connect the

video signal input jack on the video component to the

VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for picture recording.

Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component

to the AUDIO IN jacks and connect the video signal

output jack on the component to the VIDEO IN jack on

this unit to play a source from your recording component.

• If your video component has an S-video input, connect the

S-video signal input jack on the component to the S VIDEO

OUT jack.

• If your video component has an S-video output, connect the

S-video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO

IN jack.

Notes

• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,

keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is

off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.

• S-video and component video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuit. Make sure to connect this unit

to both a source component and a recording component using

the video jacks of the same system.

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEOS VIDEO

2 1 3

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM14

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT AUDIO

COMPONENT VIDEO

TUNER

ANT

MONITOR

OUT

D-TV

/CBL

DVD

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

VIDEOS VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

S VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

D-TV/CBL

DVD

VCR

OUT

D-TV

/CBL

MD/CD-R

/CD-R

(PLAY)

V-AUX

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MAIN

OUT

(REC)

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OUTPUTAUDIO

VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

V V

AUDIO

INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

indicates video cables

indicates optical cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates left analog cables

indicates signal direction

Video monitor

VCR

DVD player

TV/digital TV/

cable TV

Another video

component

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM15

CONNECTIONS

Connecting audio components

■ Connecting a CD player

Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player

to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack.

• The AUDIO jacks are available for a CD player which does not

have coaxial digital output jack.

■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD

recorder

Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD

recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/

CD-R jack for digital recording.

Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD

recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT

MD/CD-R jack to play a source from your recording

component.

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT AUDIO

TUNER

ANT

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

VIDEOS VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

S VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

D-TV/CBL

DVD

VCR

OUT

D-TV

/CBL

MD/CD-R

/CD-R

(PLAY)

V-AUX

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MAIN

OUT

(REC)

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OUTPUTAUDIO

OPTICAL INPUT

OPTICAL OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

indicates signal direction

CD player

CD recorder or

MD recorder

• The AUDIO jacks are available for an CD recorder or MD

recorder which does not have optical digital input or output

jack.

Notes

• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,

keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is

off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.

• DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks are

independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL

OUTPUT jack and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks.

indicates coaxial cables

indicates optical cables

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM16

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

TUNER

ANT

MONIT

D-TV

/CBL

DVD

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

OUT

FREQUENCY

STEP

100kHz/10kHz

FREQUENCY

STEP

50kHz/9kHz

FM/AM

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

AM loop antenna

(included)

Connecting the antennas

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and

GND terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best

reception.

Notes

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer

reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the

quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA

dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.

FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General

models)

Because the interstation frequency spacing

differs in different areas, set the

FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on

the rear panel) according to the frequency

spacing in your area.

North, Central and South America:

100 kHz/10 kHz

Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect the

AC power plug of this unit from the AC

outlet.

Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

Insert the cable wire into the

slot, and clamp it with pliers.

Snap the cover into

place.

Unit: mm

(inch)

Lead wire

Clamp with

pliers.

Clamp

with

pliers.

Insert the wire

into the slot.

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength.

Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals.

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model)

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM17

CONNECTIONS

Connecting an external decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN

left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an

external decoder, sound processor, or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the

6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and

surround channels.

Notes

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot listen to DSP programs.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of

“1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except

for “1E MAIN Lv”).

VO LTAGE

SELECTOR

SWITCHED

50W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model)

Connecting the power supply

cords

■ Connecting the AC power cord

Plug in this unit to the wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)

U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and

General models ..............................................2 OUTLETS

U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS

is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM

POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply

power to any source component connected to this unit

whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power

(total power consumption of components) that can be

connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the

area which it was purchasing.

China and General models......................................... 50 W

Other models ........................................................... 100 W

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(China and General models)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE

plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/

220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM18

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Remote control

Front panel

Turning on the power

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power of

this unit.

The level of the main volume, and then the current

DSP program name appear on the front panel display.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM19

Item

1A CENTER

1B MAIN

1C REAR LR

1D BASS

1E MAIN Lv

Description

Sets center speaker availability and size.

Sets main speaker size.

Sets rear L/R speakers availability and size.

Sets the speaker(s) to be used to output low bass signals.

Sets the main speaker level.

Possible settings (default

setting indicated in bold)

LRG/SML/NON

LARGE/SMALL

LRG/SML/NON

SWFR/MAIN/BOTH

Nrm (Normal)/–10 dB

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS

This unit has 5 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your

configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings

as well as other possible settings.

If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration,

see “1 SPEAKER SET” on pages 43-44 to change the settings.

Summary of SPEAKER SET items 1A through 1E

0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM20

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

This section explains how to adjust speaker output levels

using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is

complete, the output level heard at the listening position

should be the same from each speaker. This is important

for best performance of the digital sound field processor,

and the various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro

Logic, Dolby Pro Logic

and DTS).

Note

• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are

connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from

the PHONES jack when using the test tone.

Using the test tone

Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the

speakers. The adjustment of each speaker output level

should be made at your listening position using the

remote control.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press TEST to output the

test tone.

TEST

RETURN

BASS

–

TREBLE

–

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

VCR

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

2,5

ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

–

VOLUME

Remote control

Front panel

3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the

front panel to the center position and adjust

the volume of this unit so you can hear the

test tone.

The test tone is heard (in order) from the main left

speaker, center speaker, main right speaker, rear right

speaker, rear left speaker, and the subwoofer. The

tone is produced for 2.5 seconds from each speaker.

* Subwoofer test tone is output after the rear left

speaker (LEFT SURROUND).

The front panel display shows which speaker is

outputting the test tone.

Note

• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this

unit to standby mode and check the speaker connections.

L SUR. R SUR.

CENTER

RIGHT

LEFT

*SUBWOOFER

AMP

0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM21

ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

4 Adjust the level of the

effect speakers using j / i

so that it matches the

level of the main

speakers.

While adjusting, the test tone

is heard from the selected

speaker.

Note

• To adjust the level of the main speakers, use VOLUME knob

(or VOLUME +/– on the remote control).

5 When adjustment is

complete, press TEST to

stop the test tone.

Notes

• If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON and the

center speaker is not connected, the center channel sound is

automatically output from the main left and right speakers.

• If “1C REAR LR” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the

output level of the rear left and right speakers cannot be

adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the

rear right and left speakers.

• If “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN, the test tone

will be circulated skipping the subwoofer.

• It is not necessary to readjust the speaker levels once they are

set (as long as you do not change the speakers). You can enjoy

listening to or watching the input source at the desired volume

simply by adjusting the VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on

the remote control).

• If the output level of the effect speakers (center, rear left, and

rear right) cannot be increased enough to match the level of the

main speakers, set “1E MAIN Lv” on SET MENU to –10 dB

(see page 44). This setting decreases the main speaker output

level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set

“1E MAIN Lv” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels

for the center and rear speakers again.

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

TEST

RETURN

0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM22

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the

input selector buttons on the remote control)

to select the input source.

The selected input source name and input mode

appear on the front panel display for a few seconds.

To select the audio source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks

(When combining with a video source)

• You need to select the input to which the video source

component is connected before selecting audio source.

Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the

front panel display.

Note

• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other

source can be played. To select another input source, first press

6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel

display.

INPUT

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

EFFECT

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

AUX

TV/CBL

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

353

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Remote control

Front panel

Selected input source

6CH INPUT

Remote controlFront panel

0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM23

BASIC PLAYBACK

4 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the

component.

5 Adjust the volume to the desired level.

The volume level is displayed digitally.

Example: –70 dB

Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to

0 dB (maximum)

The volume level indicator also shows the current

volume level as a bar graph.

If desired, use BASS and TREBLE. These controls

only effect the sound from the main speakers.

Notes

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left

and right speakers.

• If you have connected a recording component to the VCR

OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or

low volume during playback of other components, try turning

the recording component on.

6 Select a DSP program if desired.

Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on

the remote control) to select a DSP program. See

pages 29 to 33 for details about DSP programs.

When using the remote control, press AMP before

selecting a DSP program.

SLEEP

6CH INPUT

AUX

TV/CBL

AMP

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

VOLUME

–

VOLUME

BASS

–

TREBLE

–

Front panel

Remote control

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to enjoy video images

from a video source together with sounds from an audio

source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical

music while having beautiful scenery from a video source

on the video monitor.

Select a source from the video group, then select a source

from the audio group using the input selector buttons on

the remote control. BGV selections cannot be made with

INPUT l / h on the front panel.

■ To mute the sound

1 Press MUTE on the

remote control.

To resume the audio output,

press MUTE again.

• You can also cancel mute by pressing VOLUME +/–, etc.

• During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front

panel display.

■ When you have finished using

this unit

1 Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the

remote control) to set this unit in the

standby mode.

PROGRAM

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Front panel Remote control

STANDBY

/ON

STANDBY

Front panel

Remote control

MUTE

0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM24

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

Input modes and indications

This unit comes with a variety input jacks. You can select

the type of input signals you desire.

Each time you turn on the power of this unit, the input

mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” setting on

the SET MENU (see page 47 for details).

1 Press INPUT MODE (the input selector

button that you have pressed to select the

input source on the remote control)

repeatedly until the desired input mode is

shown on the front panel display.

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is selected

automatically as follows:

1) Digital signal

2) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal

encoded with DTS is selected, even if

another signal is input at the same time.

ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is

selected, even if a digital signal is input at

the same time.

Notes

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the

type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate

setting.

• When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on

some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a

moment when playback resumes after a search because the

digital signal is selected again.

• When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded,

the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case,

set the input mode to ANALOG.

INPUT MODE

DVD AUTO

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

SLEEP

6CH INPUT

AUX

TV/CBL

AMP

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

Remote controlFront panel

Input mode

■ Notes on 96-kHz sampling digital

signals

The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96-kHz

sampling digital signals. Note the following when 96-kHz

sampling digital signal is input to this unit:

– DSP programs cannot be selected.

– Sound will be output as 2-channel stereo from only the

main left and right speakers. (There may be sound

output from the subwoofer depending on the

SPEAKER MODE settings on the SET MENU.)

Therefore, the level of the effect speakers cannot be

adjusted while listening to such a source.

■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs

• If the digital output data of the player has been

processed in any way, you may not be able to perform

DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection

between this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and

set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may

reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In

this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and

set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit

reproduces no sound.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with

the input mode set to AUTO;

– This unit automatically switches to the DTS-

decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after

having detected the DTS signal. When playback of

the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator

may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS

source can be played. If you want to play a normal

PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.

– When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or

skip operation is performed during playback of a

DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this

status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit

will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”

mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”

indicator will turn off.

0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM25

BASIC PLAYBACK

Selecting a sound field program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. For details about each program, see pages

29 to 33.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press one of the DSP program buttons on

the remote control to select the desired

program.

The name of the selected program appears on the

front panel display.

AMP

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

PROGRAM l / h

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

EFFECT

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

2,3

3 After selecting the desired program, press

the same button repeatedly to select the

desired sub-program if available.

Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly

switches the sub-program between

“Sci-Fi” and “Spectacle”.

Notes

• There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this

unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format

and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal

formats.

• The digital sound field processor cannot be used when a source

connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected or

when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.

• The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program.

Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the

effect created by the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source

and DSP program are memorized and are automatically

selected when you turn on the power again.

• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode

is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9) automatically

switches to the appropriate decoding program.

• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/

Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC Movie,

no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear

speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If

“1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center

channel sound is output from the main speakers.)

• You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM

l / h on the front panel.

• Select a program based on your listening preference. Program

names are just for reference.

DGTLz Sci-Fi

LCR

LFE

DSP

DIGITAL

VOLUME

MOVIE

THTR

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

Sub-program name

Program name

DGTL Spectacle

LCR

LFE

DSP

DIGITAL

VOLUME

MOVIE

THTR

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Program name

Sub-program name

0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM26

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

4 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the

decoder; PRO LOGIC or PRO LOGIC

5 After selecting on the decoder (PRO LOGIC

), select the mode appropriate for the

source by pressing q/DTS SUR.

The selection switches as follow;

PRO LOGIC

Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music

• You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Movie, and PRO

LOGIC Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front

panel repeatedly.

■ Selecting PRO LOGIC

You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five

discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC

in program

No. 9.

1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback

on the source component.

2 Press AMP.

3 Press q/DTS SUR.

The previously selected sub program appears on the

front panel display.

PRO LOGIC

DSP

PRO LOGIC

VOLUME

PRO

LOGIC

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Remote control

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

PROGRAM l / h

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

EFFECT

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

3,4,5

AMP

0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM27

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ Playing Dolby Digital Surround

EX or DTS ES software

Press MATRIX 6.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital + Matrix

6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder.

The display changes AUTO → Matrix6.1 → OFF each

time the MATRIX 6.1 button is pressed.

AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby

Digital + Matrix 6.1 and DTS + Matrix 6.1

depending on the signal. Virtual rear center

speaker does not work for 5.1 channel

sources.

Matrix6.1: This setting produces 6-channel playback of

the input source using the Matrix 6.1

decoder. The virtual rear center speaker can

be used when playing a 5.1-channel source.

OFF: Virtual rear center speaker does not work in

this setting.

Notes

• The setting becomes AUTO once this unit turns into standby

mode.

• Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software may not

contain the signal that is necessary for this unit to switch to the

Matrix 6.1 decoding mode. To turn on the Matrix 6.1 decoder

when playing such a source, select “Matrix6.1”.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP

programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers

to reproduce a natural sound field.

You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C

REAR LR” in the SET MENU to NON. Sound field

processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP

automatically.

Note

• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases:

– when the 5ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic

Normal, Pro Logic , or DTS Normal program is selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;

– when using the test tone; or

– when connecting the headphones.

MATRIX 6.1

+10

The MATRIX indicator lights up.

STEREO

EFFECT

ENTER

STEREO

EFFECT

Front panel

Remote control

Spectacle 6.1

DSP

MATRIX

DIGITAL

MOVIE

THTR

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER

TV/CBL

MD/CD

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

■ SILENT CINEMA DSP

You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you

could expert from actual speakers with SILENT

CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP

by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack

while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the

DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT”

indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When

sound effects are off, you listen to the source with normal

stereo reproduction.)

Notes

• This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or

96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.

• The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the

headphone.

■ Normal Stereo Reproduction

1 Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect

for normal stereo reproduction.

Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back

on.

Notes

• If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the

center speaker, rear speakers.

• If you turn off the sound effects while a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is

automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear

speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.

• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the

sound effects or if you set “4 D. RANGE” on the SET MENU

to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.

• The sound of LFE channel will be directed to the main left and

right or the subwoofer (or both) channels depending on the

setting of “1D BASS” on the SET MENU.

During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as

the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from

the components connected to this unit.

(While playing a source)

1 Press AMP.

2 Press d to display the information about the

input signal.

0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM28

BASIC

OPERATION

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Understanding sound fields

A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a

particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear

early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound

produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and

other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives

each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.

YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to

measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music

venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the

direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then

we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this

unit.

■ Recreating a sound field

Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your

listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound

field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires three effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.

The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the three effect speakers to localize the

virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener.

Hi-Fi DSP programs

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.

No.

Program

CONCERT HALL

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT

ENTERTAINMENT/

Disco

ENTERTAINMENT/

5ch Stereo

Features

A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions

emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual

seat is near the center, close to the stage.

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that

seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound.

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at

LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The

sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate”

sound.

Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for

background music at parties, etc.

0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:42 PM29

CINEMA-DSP

Sound design of CINEMA-DSP

Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread

even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with

the images on the screen.

CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP

integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field

programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In

CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and

Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,

and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.

When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the

most suitable sound field program for that signal.

L SURROUND SOUND FIELD

R SURROUND SOUND FIELD

PRESENCE SOUND FIELD

DIALOG

EFFECT MUSIC

In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby

Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic

decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder

for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder for adding a rear center channel

(the rear center channel is outputted from virtual rear center speaker). You can select CINEMA-DSP programs to

optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source.

0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:43 PM30

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CINEMA-DSP

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without

using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound

localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality

sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby

Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater.

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing

on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,

left surround, and right surround channels. This

processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense

sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital-

or DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the

clear separation of all channels.

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + Matrix 6.1 + DSP sound field effect

These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear

center DSP sound field created from the virtual rear center speaker.

■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect

Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right,

and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby

Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and

right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro

Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are

designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate

nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and

decoding processes.

■ Dolby Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic decodes Dolby Surround software into 5 discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2

channels in rear). There are 2 modes; MOVIE for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel audio sources.

Surround DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:43 PM31

CINEMA-DSP

CINEMA-DSP programs

■ For movie programs: No. 7 to 9

This unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern according to the input signal

format.

Table of Program Names for Each Input Format

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

DOLBY

DIGITAL

DTS DIGITAL

SUR

PRO LOGIC

2 channel

Stereo

70 mm Spectacle

70 mm Sci-Fi

70 mm Adventure

70 mm General

—

Normal

Enhanced

Movie

Music

DOLBY DIGITAL

DGTL Spectacle

DGTL Sci-Fi

DGTL Adventure

DGTL General

Normal

Enhanced

—

5.1 channel

DTS

DTS Spectacle

DTS Sci-Fi

DTS Adventure

DTS General

—

Normal

Enhanced

—

DTS

Matrix 6.1

Spectacle 6.1

Sci-Fi 6.1

Adventure 6.1

General 6.1

—

Matrix 6.1

Enhanced 6.1

—

6.1 channel *

Input

Program

DOLBY DIGITAL

Matrix 6.1

Spectacle 6.1

Sci-Fi 6.1

Adventure 6.1

General 6.1

Matrix 6.1

Enhanced 6.1

—

* means the Matrix 6.1 decoder is ON.

• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will automatically switch to

the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.

• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the MATRIX 6.1 button

on the remote control, the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP

program is selected.

• MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with the virtual rear center

speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel.

• When playing a 6.1 channel source with MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control turned off, the program name changes to the

corresponding name for 5.1 channel.

Notes

• The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting program No. 9 except in Enhanced mode.

• When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, main and rear

speakers output effect sounds.

No.

0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:43 PM32

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CINEMA-DSP

Program

Enhanced Mode

No.

Program

ENTERTAINMENT/

Game

ENTERTAINMENT/

Concert Video

TV SPORTS

MONO MOVIE

Features

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to concert video sounds.

With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows,

music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is

oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the

surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained.

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The

program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence

sound field.

■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you

feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.

No.

Features

This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It

precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound

field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of

science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the

silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm

and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the

newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as

much as possible.

This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films,

and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is

relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the

echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film

theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital

sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound

orientation.

The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from

the back to the left and right, and toward the screen.

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

General

0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:43 PM33

TUNING

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l

to tune in to a lower frequency.

When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown on the front panel display.

• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not

stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

you must tune in to it manually.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 described in

“Automatic tuning” at left.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from

the front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,

press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue the tuning search.

Note

• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change

the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.

Automatic and manual tuning

There are 2 ways to tune; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Press INPUT l / h (TUNER on the remote

control) to select TUNER as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,

press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

INPUT

PRESET

TUNING

233

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Lights up

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

POWER

SLEEP

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Goes off

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

PRESET

TUNING

A AM 144O

TUNED

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER

TV/CBL

MD/CD

A AM 144O

TUNED

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER

TV/CBL

MD/CD

A AM 144O

TUNED

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER

TV/CBL

MD/CD

0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:44 PM34

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TUNING

Presetting stations

■ Automatically presetting stations

(for FM stations)

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those

stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in

to any preset station by selecting the preset station

number (see page 37).

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number and the “MEMORY” and

“AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about

5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the

frequency currently displayed toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO

A1:FM

MEMORY

AUTO

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

Lights up

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• When a station data is stored under a preset number, the

frequency and reception band are also stored.

• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or

AM station by simply following the procedure in the section

“Manually presetting stations” on page 36.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually

in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure

in “Manually presetting stations” on page 36.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit

will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again.

FM/AM

0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:44 PM35

TUNING

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5

groups) manually.

1 Tune in to a station.

See page 34 for tuning instructions.

When tuned in to a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of received station.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about

5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears and make sure that the

colon (:) appears on the front panel display.

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

C :AM 63O kHz

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

32,5

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

Flashes

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is

flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear on the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

A AM 63O kHz

TUNED

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

PRESET

TUNING

C3:AM 63O kHz

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

C3:AM 63O kHz

TUNED

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:44 PM36

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TUNING

Exchanging preset stations

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations.

The example below describes the procedure for

exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Tuning in to a preset station” at left.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Tuning in to a preset station

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote

control) to select the preset station group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET

u / d on the remote control) to select a

preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

A5:FM 9O.6 MHz

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

EDIT E1-A5

MEMORY

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

Shows the exchange of stations has

been completed.

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

–

2,4 1,3 1,3

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

STANDBY

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

TUNED

MEMORY

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

TUNED

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM37

Description of RDS data

This unit can receive, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data

when receiving RDS broadcasting stations.

■ PS (Program Service name)

mode:

The name of the RDS station being received is displayed.

■ PTY (Program Type) mode:

There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations.

■ RT (Radio Text) mode:

Information about the program (such as the title of the

song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being

received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric

characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other

characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with

under-bars.

■ CT (Clock Time) mode:

The current time is displayed and updated every minute.

If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may

appear.

■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks):

Refer to following page.

Changing the RDS mode

The four modes are available in this unit for displaying

RDS data. When an RDS station is being received, PS,

PTY, RT and/or CT mode indicators that correspond to

the RDS data services offered by the station light up on

the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/FREQ

repeatedly to change the display mode among the RDS

data offered by the transmitting station in the order shown

below.

Notes

• When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS

MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up

on the front panel display. If you press the button before the

indicators light up on the front panel display, the mode cannot

be changed. This is because this unit has not yet received all of

the RDS data on the station.

• RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected.

• The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the

received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode

requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible

that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS

modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed.

• RDS data cannot sometimes be received under poor reception

conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO”

indicator goes off from the front panel display. Although the

reception mode is changed to monaural by this operation, when

you change the display to RDS mode, RDS data may be

displayed.

• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference

during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service

may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front

panel display.

PS mode

RDS mode

OFF

CT mode

RT mode

PTY mode

NEWS

AFFAIRS

INFO

SPORT

EDUCATE

DRAMA

CULTURE

SCIENCE

VARIED

POP M

ROCK M

M.O.R. M

LIGHT M

CLASSICS

OTHER M

News

Current affairs

General information

Sports

Education

Drama

Culture

Science

Light entertainment

Pops

Rock

Middle-of-the-road music

(easy-listening)

Light classics

Serious classics

Other music

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS

RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system by FM stations in many countries.

RDS data contains various information such as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT

(Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations.

0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM38

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS

PTY SEEK function

If you select the desired program type, this unit

automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are

broadcasting a program of the required type.

1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the

PTY SEEK mode.

The program type of the station being received or

“NEWS” flashes on the front panel display.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the

desired program type.

The selected program type appears on the front panel

display.

3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching

all preset RDS stations.

The selected program type flashes and the “PTY

HOLD” indicator lights up on the front panel display

while searching for stations.

• If a station that is broadcasting a program of the

required type is found, this unit stops at that

station.

• If the called station is not the desired one, press

PTY SEEK START again. This unit begins

searching for another station that is broadcasting a

program of the same type.

■ To cancel this function

Press PTY SEEK MODE twice.

PTY SEEK

MODE

START

EON function

This function uses the EON data service on the RDS

station network. If you simply select the desired program

type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit

automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are

scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and

switches from the station being currently received to the

new station when the broadcasts starts.

Note

• This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers

the EON data service is being received. When such a station is

being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the front

panel display.

1 Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up

on the front panel display.

If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to

another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator

lights up.

2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired

program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or

SPORT).

The selected program type name appears on the front

panel display.

• If a preset RDS station of the selected program

type starts broadcasting, this unit will

automatically switch from the program being

currently received to that program. (EON indicator

flashes.)

• When broadcasting of the required program ends,

the previously received station (or another

program on the same station) is recalled.

■ To cancel this function

Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights

up on the front panel display.

PTY SEEK

MODE

START

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

Flashes

Lights up

PRESET

TUNING

PTY HOLD

0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM39

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The

sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while

this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer

also automatically turns off the external component(s)

connected to AC OUTLET(S).

The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.

• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you

can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions

of the timer.

Setting the sleep timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly

to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP,

the front panel display changes

as shown below.

3 The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front

panel display soon after the sleep timer has

been set.

The display then returns to the previous indication.

SLEEP

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

SLEEP 12Omin

DSP

PCM

SLEEP

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

CONCERT HALL

DSP

PCM

SLEEP

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

SLEEP TIMER

Canceling the sleep timer

1 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the

“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns

to the previous indication.

• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit

in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control

(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the

AC power cord from the AC outlet.

0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM40

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

INPUT

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

SLEEP

6CH INPUT

AUX

TV/CBL

AMP

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

Front panel Remote control

RECORDING

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between the components connected to this unit.

• The setting of BASS, TREBLE, VOLUME, “5 L/R

BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not

effect the recorded material.

• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks on this unit

cannot be recorded.

• A given input source is not output to the same OUT (REC)

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not

output to VCR OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material

may infringe copyright laws.

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

■ Special considerations when

recording DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your

player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its

operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog

signal will be output from the player.

■ Timer playback/recording

This unit can perform playback or recording with an

external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operating

instructions for the component and the timer to be used.

Notes

• Stored data, such as input source, will be reflected when

playback or recording with the timer.

• If you do not want any sound output when recording with a

timer, turn the volume down.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

(input source, volume level, set menu settings and so

on) from being lost even if this unit is disconnected

from the AC outlet. However, if the timer is turned off

for more than one week, the stored data will be lost.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SILENT

PHONES

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

STANDBY

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for these components.

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected component.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM41

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

Adjusting the items on the SET

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

Note

• Some items require extra steps.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press SET MENU to enter

the SET MENU.

3 Press u/d repeatedly to

select the item you want

to adjust (1 to 10).

• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the

same order as when pressing d.

4 Press j / i once to enter

the setup mode of the

selected item.

The last setting you adjusted

appears on the front panel

display.

Depending on the item, press

u/d to select a sub item.

SET MENU

ADVANCED OPERATION

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

VCR

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

3,6

4,5

The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the

speaker mode setting. Choose the appropriate item and

adjust or select the values as necessary.

• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a

source.

Items Initial settings

1 SPEAKER SET

A CENTER LRG (large)

B MAIN LARGE

C REAR LR LRG (large)

D BASS BOTH

E MAIN Lv Nrm (Normal)

2 LFE LEVEL SP/HP 0 dB

3 SP DLY TIME 0 ms

4 D. RANGE SP/HP MAX

5 L/R BALANCE 0 dB for L/R

HP TONE CTRL BASS/TRBL

0 dB

7 I/O ASSIGN

A (component video input) [A] DVD

[B] D-TV/CBL

B (optical output) (1) MD/CD-R

C (optical input) (2) MD/CD-R

(3) DVD

(4) D-TV/CBL

D (coaxial input) (5) CD

8 INPUT MODE AUTO

9 DISPLAY SET

DIMMER 0

10 MEM. GUARD OFF

• In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the

default setting is indicated in bold.

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

AMP

0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM42

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

5 Press j / i repeatedly to

change the setting of the

item.

6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu

disappears or simply press one of the DSP

program group buttons to exit SET MENU.

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode

settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration.

Notes

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,

some items are not affected.

• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level

adjustments in items 1A through 1D are not affected.

■ 1A CENTER (center speaker

mode)

By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

this unit can provide better dialog localization for several

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and

images.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire

range of the center channel signal is directed to the center

speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D

BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the

center channel signal are directed to the main left and

right speakers.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected

from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for

more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,

adjust the items again.

0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM43

SET MENU

■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode)

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire

range of the main left and right channel signal is directed

to the main left and right speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”.

■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode)

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or

if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the

rear left and right speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers.

The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D

BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have rear speakers.

• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you

select NON for “1C REAR LR”.

■ 1D BASS (LFE/bass out mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-

frequency signals can be directed to both main left and

right speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used

for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are

directed to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE

signals are directed to the main speakers.

BOTH

The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Low-

frequency signals designated to the main channels in

accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed

to both main speakers and a subwoofer.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “1D BASS”, the low-frequency

signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to

the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main

speaker mode.

■ 1E MAIN Lv (main level mode)

Change this setting if you cannot match the output level

of the center, and rear (L/R) speakers with the main

speakers because of unusually high-efficiency

performance from the main speakers.

Choices: Nrm (Normal), –10 dB

Nrm

Select this if you can match the output level of your effect

speakers with that of your main speakers when using the

test tone.

–10 dB

Select this if you cannot match the output level of your

effect speakers with that of your main speakers when

using the test tone.

0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM44

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

2 LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a

Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the

low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to

certain scenes.

Control range:

SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB

HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

1 Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted.

2 Press j to adjust the LFE level.

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay

time)

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel

sounds. This feature works when there is sound output

from the center speaker, with a source like Dolby Digital

or DTS, etc. Ideally, the center speaker should be the

same distance from the main listening position as the left

and right speakers. However, in most home situations, the

center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers.

By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the

apparent distance from the center speaker to the main

listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the

same as the distance between the main left and right

speaker to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time

for the center speaker is especially important for giving

depth to the dialogue.

Control range:

CENTER .......................... 0 to 5 ms

Initial setting:

CENTER .......................... 0 ms

1 Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay

of the center channel sounds.

Center speaker image

• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers

about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening

position.

0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM45

SET MENU

7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output

assignment)

It is possible to assign jacks according to the component

to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack

or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component

names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes

it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively

connect more components.

Once you assign, you can select that component with

INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the

remote control).

■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for

COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks

Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL

[B] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL

■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL

OUTPUT jack

Choices: (1) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL

INPUT jacks

Choices: (2) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

(3) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

(4) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL

INPUT jack

Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

Notes

• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of

jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

4 D. RANGE (dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting

is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital

signals.

Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum)

MAX

Select the “MAX” for feature films.

STD

Select the “STD” for general use.

MIN

Select the “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the

main left and right speakers)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level

from the main left and right speakers.

Control range: 20 steps for L/R

Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R

1 Press i to decrease the output level for the

main left speaker. Press j for the main right

speaker.

6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone

control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you use your headphones.

Control range (dB):

BASS ............... –6 to +3

TRBL (treble) .. –6 to +3

Initial setting:

BASS ............... 0 dB

TRBL............... 0 dB

0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM46

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

8 INPUT MODE (initial input

mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn

on this unit (see page 25 for details about the input

mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

AUTO

Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the

type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.

LAST

Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last

input mode used for the respective source.

9 DISPLAY SET

■ DIMMER

You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Control range: –4 to 0

Initial setting: 0

10 MEM. GUARD (memory guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings

on this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• All SET MENU items

• Center, rear speakers, and subwoofer levels

• DSP program parameters

Notes

• When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone.

• When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET

MENU items.

0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM47

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other

manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes.

Control area

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

■ Controlling other component

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component to be controlled by pressing an input selector

button.

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Å/ı buttons and input selector

buttons switch the control area

for each component.

* Å/ı buttons are to operate

the other components that are

not connected to this unit.

Factory setting:

Å...VCR

ı...TV

Component control area

You can control up to 9 different components. You can set up

manufacturer code and program other remote control functions for

each component (see page 50).

Å/ı buttons

and input

selector buttons

The buttons in the

dotted lines

(SYSTEM

POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, 6CH

INPUT, VOLUME

+/– and MUTE)

function in any

mode.

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Press AMP to

control this unit.

0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM48

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Setting the manufacturer code

You can control other components by setting a

manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 9

component controls.

The following table shows factory-set component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each component control.

1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to

select the component you want to set up.

2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.

3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four

digit manufacturer’s code for the component

to be used.

Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES”

at the end of this manual.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.

Notes

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup

process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2.

SLEEP

6CH INPUT

AUX

TV/CBL

AMP

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

CODE SET

Component

control

(buttons)

MD/CD-R

TUNER

DVD

D-TV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

Component category

(Library)

TUNER

DVD

–

Manufacturer

YAMAHA

–

TRANSMIT

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Code

0005

0024

0003

0098

–

Clearing setup manufacturer

codes

■ Clearing setup manufacturer

code for the component control

1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to

select the component control for which you

want to clear the manufacturer code.

2 Press CODE SET by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2,

the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from

step 1.

3 Enter the code number “0000”.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice, and the

manufacturer code for the selected component is

cleared.

• You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering

the code number “9990”.

POWER

SLEEP

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

CODE SET

TRANSMIT

0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM49

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Controlling other components

DVD player VCR TV, digital/cable TV CD player CD/MD recorder Tuner

1 AV POWER *

Power *

VCR power *

Power *

Power

2 TV POWER *

TV power *

TV power

3 TV CH + *

TV channel up *

TV channel up TV channel up *

TV channel up *

TV channel up

TV CH – *

TV channel down

TV channel down TV channel down

TV channel down

4 TV VOL + *

TV volume up *

TV volume up TV volume up *

TV volume up *

TV volume up

TV VOL – *

TV volume down

TV volume down TV volume down

TV volume down

5 TV MUTE *

TV mute *

TV mute TV mute *

TV mute *

TV mute

6 TV INPUT *

TV input *

TV input TV input *

TV input *

TV input

7 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8)

8 TITLE Title

9 PRESET/CH u Up VCR channel up Preset up

PRESET/CH d Down

VCR channel down

Preset down

PRESET/CH j Left

PRESET/CH i Right

SELECT Select

0 RETURN Return

REC/DISC SKIP

Disc skip Rec *

VCR rec Disc skip Rec (MD)

w Play Play *

VCR play Play Play

Search backward Search backward

VCR search backward

Search backward Search backward

r Search forward Search forward *

VCR search forward

Search forward Search forward

AUDIO Audio

d Pause Pause *

VCR pause Pause Pause

t Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward

y Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward

a Stop Stop *

VCR stop Stop Stop

w ENTER Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index

e MENU Menu A/B/C/D/E

r DISPLAY Display Display Display

You can operate other components when you have set the

manufacturer code for your component. Note, however,

that some buttons may not operate your component.

Once you select an input source, the remote control

switches to the mode for operating the component.

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has POWER button.

These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL or ı. When the

manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/CBL and ı areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/CBL area.

These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR.

0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM50

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker

(center, rear left and right, and subwoofer) while listening

to a source.

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

1 Press AMP.

(While playing a source)

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker(s) you want to adjust.

Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker

changes and appears on the front panel display as

follows: center, rear right, rear left and subwoofer.

LEVEL

TITLE

AMP

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

LEVEL

TITLE

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS

• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to

be adjusted by pressing d / u.

Center speaker output level

Subwoofer output level

Rear left speaker output

level

Rear right speaker output

level

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

• The control range for the center or rear left and

right speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

• The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB

to –20 dB.

Notes

• When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C

REAR LR” are set to NON, and “1D BASS” to MAIN, the

output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there

is no sound coming from these speakers.

• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you

made with the test tone will be changed.

• We recommend adjusting the speakers by following the steps

described in “Using the test tone” on pages 21 and 22.

■ For 5ch Stereo

You can adjust the volume level for each channel in 5-

channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

• CT level (Center level)

• RL level (Rear left level)

• RR level (Rear right level)

1 Select 5ch Stereo.

2 Press u / d repeatedly to select the

speaker(s) you want to adjust.

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected

from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for

more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,

set the output level again.

0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM51

You can adjust the time difference between the beginning

of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of

the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the

value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay

time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs.

The following table shows factory-set delay time.

AMP

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

1 Press AMP.

(While playing a source)

2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust the

delay time.

3 Press u / d so that “DELAY” appears on the

front panel display.

4 Press j / i to adjust the delay time.

Notes

• Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with

some sources.

• The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay

time.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected

from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for

more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,

adjust the delay time again.

Program

Preset value (ms)

1. CONCERT HALL 45

2. JAZZ CLUB 30

3. ROCK CONCERT 15

4. DISCO 26

GAME 36

CONCERT VIDEO 21

5. TV SPORTS 10

6. MONO MOVIE 69

7. 70 mm SPECTACLE 23

DGTL SPECTACLE 15

DTS SPECTACLE 15

Spectacle 6.1 15

70 mm SCI-FI 20

Sci-Fi 6.1 15

DGTL SCI-FI 15

DTS SCI-FI 15

8. 70 mm ADVENTURE 20

DGTL ADVENTURE 15

DTS ADVENTURE 15

Adventure 6.1 15

70 mm GENERAL 20

DGTL GENERAL 15

DTS GENERAL 15

General 6.1 15

9. PRO LOGIC/NORMAL 15

DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL 5

DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL 5

Matrix 6.1 5

PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED 20

DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED 5

DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED 5

Enhanced 6.1 5

PRO LOGIC Movie 15

PRO LOGIC Music 5

DELAY

0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM52

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Changing parameter settings

You can adjust the values of PRO LOGIC Music

parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in

your listening room.

Adjustments should be made with the remote control.

1 Press AMP.

2 Select PRO LOGIC Music.

3 Press u / d to select the

parameter.

4 Press j / i to change the

parameter value.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 above as necessary to

change other parameters.

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

MATRIX 6.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

Note

• You cannot change parameter values when “10 MEM.

GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter value you edited will

return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter

value again.

PRO LOGIC Music parameter

descriptions

■ PANORAMA

Function: Turning the function on extends the front

stereo image to include the surround

speakers for wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.

■ DIMENSION

Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either

towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the

front), initial setting is STD (standard).

■ CT WIDTH (Center width)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three

front speakers to varying degrees. The

larger the value, adjusts the center image

towards the main left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only

from center speaker) to 7 (center channel

sound is output only from main left and

right speakers), initial setting is 3.

ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC MUSIC

AMP

0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM53

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed

below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and

contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

No sound.

The picture does not

appear.

Cause

The power cord is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

on the rear panel is not fully set to either

the left or right position.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

An appropriate input source has not been

selected.

The speaker connections are not secure.

The volume is turned down.

The sound is muted.

Digital signals which this unit cannot

reproduce are being input to this unit by

playing a CD-ROM, etc.

The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Remedy

Firmly connect the power cord.

Set the switch fully to the left or right position when

this unit is in the standby mode.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection does not touch anything other than

its respective connection.

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the

power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then

start operating.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT

l / h

or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons).

Secure the connections.

Turn up the volume.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

Make connections using the same type of video

jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or

COMPONENT VIDEO) for both the input and

output.

Refer

to page

—

10, 11

—

10 – 16

10, 11

—

14, 15

0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM54

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

The sound suddenly

goes off.

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

No sound from the

center speaker.

No sound from the

rear speakers.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

Poor bass

reproduction.

Cause

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

The sleep timer has functioned.

The sound is muted.

Incorrect cable connections.

Incorrect setting of “5 L/R BALANCE”

on the SET MENU.

The sound effect is off.

A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or

DTS decoding DSP program is being

used with material not encoded with

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.

A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is

being input to this unit.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

“1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set

to NON.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4)

has been selected (except for 5ch Stereo).

The source encoded with a Dolby Digital

or DTS signal does not have a center

channel signal.

The output level of the rear speakers is

set to minimum.

A monaural source is being played with

program 9.

“1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to

MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being played.

“1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to

SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel

source is being played.

The source does not contain low bass

signals (90 Hz and below).

“1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to

SWFR or BOTH and your system does

not include a subwoofer.

The speaker mode settings (main, center,

or rear) on the SET MENU does not

match your speaker configuration.

Remedy

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set

to the appropriate position and then turn this unit

back on.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other

and then turn this unit back on.

Turn on the power, and play the source again.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on.

Select another DSP program.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker.

Select another DSP program.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers.

Select another DSP program.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

Select BOTH.

Select MAIN.

Select the appropriate position for each speaker

based on the size of the speakers in your

configuration.

Refer

to page

—

10, 11

26 – 33

—

26 – 33

—

26 – 33

—

43, 44

0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM55

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

The volume level

cannot be increased, or

the sound is distorted.

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack

of this unit.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

This unit does not

operate properly.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

There is noise

interference from digital

or high-frequency

equipment, or this unit.

This unit suddenly

turns into the standby

mode.

Cause

Incorrect cable connections.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

It is not possible to record the sound

effect by a recording component.

A source component is not connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.

“10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU

is set to ON.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Speaker cables are short circuited.

This unit is too close to the digital or

high-frequency equipment.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Remedy

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

Turn on the power to the component.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks of this unit.

Set “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU to

OFF.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

Make sure all speaker cables are connected

correctly.

Move this unit further away from such

equipment.

Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it

back on.

Refer

to page

10 – 16

—

0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM56

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Tuner

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

There are buzzing and

whining noises

(especially in the

evening).

Problem

Cause

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

A TV set is being used nearby.

Remedy

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Re-store the stations.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

Move this unit away from the TV.

Refer

to page

—

35, 36

—

■ Remote control

Problem

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

Cause

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

The batteries are weak.

The manufacture code has not correctly

set.

Even if the manufacturer code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Remedy

The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Reposition this unit.

Replace all batteries with new ones.

Set the code correctly.

Try setting another code of the same

manufacturer.

Refer to

page

—

0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM57

GLOSSARY

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for

dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound

within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that

gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.

With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel).

By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with previously unheard of

excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

■ Matrix 6.1

The unit incorporates Matrix 6.1 decoder for Dolby

Digital and DTS multi-channel software that enables 6.1-

channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to

existing 5.1-channel format. (The rear center channel is

created from rear left and right channels, and outputted

from virtual rear center speaker.) With this additional

channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic

moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over ” and

“fly-around ” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround

softwares. This new technology enables a discrete 5-

channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1

center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead

of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel

sources in addition to the movie mode.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can

enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial

representation of DTS digital surround in your home.

This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel

sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear

channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a

total of 5.1 channels).

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1 channel systems.

■ CINEMA DSP

DIGITAL

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and

designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,

such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and

so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are

differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth

of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses

YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to

provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater

in the listening room of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed using headphones.

0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM58

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

GLOSSARY

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any rear speakers by using

virtual rear speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number

of quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the

and P

signals for the chrominance. Color can

be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent. The component

signal is also called the “color difference signal” because

the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in order

to use the component signal for output.

0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM59

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 75 W

[Other models] .................................................................... 65 W

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 80 W

[Other models] .................................................................... 70 W

• DIN Standard Output Power

[Europe model]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 110 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China, Korea and General models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................... 95 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 95/115/140/160 W

[Other models] ............................................... 90/110/130/150 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................0.06%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

• Phones Output ............................................................. 0.34 V/560 Ω

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ

6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ

• Output Level

OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ

OUTPUT SUBWOOFER .......................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL

• Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

• S-Video Signal Level

Y ................................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Component Video Signal Level

Y ................................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

, P

............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)

Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB

• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz

[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz

[U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz

[Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz

[China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model] .................................................................... 210 W

[Canada model] ...................................................... 210 W/260 VA

[Other models] ..................................................................... 230 W

Standby Mode ............................................................. max. 0.9 W

• AC Outlets

[U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models]

.......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum)

• Dimension (W x H x D)

........................ 435 x 151 x 387 mm (17” x 5-15/16” x 15-1/8”)

• Weight ................................................................... 10.0 kg (21.3 lbs)

• Accessories ............................................................... Remote control

Batteries

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter [U.K. model]

A/V cable [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models]

AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

*Specifications are subject to change without notice.

0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM60

LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES

LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS

LISTE DER HERSTELLER-CODES

LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER

LISTA DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE

LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES

LIJST MET FABRIKANTENCODES

ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911,

1021, 1081

AIKO 0891

AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231,

1191, 1351, 1591,

1641, 1791, 1891,

1981

AKURA 1331

ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361

ALBIRAL 1971

AMSTRAD 1301, 1511

ANAM 1171

ARC EN CIEL 0571

ARCAM 0571, 0761

ARISTONA 0751

ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641

ASA 0411, 0451, 0521,

0781, 0871, 1021,

1081, 1421, 2051,

2091, 2151, 2551

ASTRA 1511

ATANTIC 0761

ATLANTIC 0761

ATORI 1511

AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511

AUSIND 0491, 1411

AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481,

0491, 0601, 0781,

0951, 1051, 1081,

1391, 1421

BAIRD 1101, 1351

BANG & OLUFSEN 1081

BASIC LINE 1321, 1331

BAUER 1451

BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121,

0131, 0221, 1561

BEKO 2491, 2501

BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241,

0251, 0471, 0741,

2201, 2211, 2221,

2231, 2241, 2261,

2571, 2581

BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731,

0901, 1821

BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081

BRITANNIA 0761

BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021,

1081

BSR 0391, 0691, 1621,

1901, 1981

BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331,

1641, 1741, 2131,

2151

BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611

CANDLE 0791

CENTURY 1021, 1081

CGE 0491, 0811, 0981,

1401, 1531, 1611,

1621, 1981, 2201,

2251, 2271

CITIZEN 0791

CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971

CLATRONIC 1181, 1331

CONCERTO 0791

CONDOR 0761

CONTEC 0151, 1171

CONTINENTAL EDISON

0571, 0651, 0901

CRAIG 1171

CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021,

1081, 1401, 1981,

2201, 2251, 2271

CROWN 2541

CTC CLATRONIC 0261

CXC 1171

DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511,

2611

DANSAI 0101

DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601,

0971, 1101, 1691

DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601,

1101, 1681

DEGRAAF 0451, 1351

DIXI 0991, 1511

DOMEOS 0101

DORIC 1031

DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611,

1641, 2101

DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621,

2111

DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781,

1021, 1081, 1981,

2121, 2151

DYNATRON 0101

ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031

ELECTRO TECH 1511

ELEKTRONSKA 0771

ELMAN 0261, 1621

ELTA 1511

EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081,

1121, 1171, 1261,

1301

ERRES 0101

ETRON 1981

EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601,

0771, 1091, 1621,

2001

FENNER 0101, 1511

FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551,

0651, 0781, 0861,

0881, 1131, 1181,

1361, 1461, 1971,

1991, 2281, 2311,

2341

FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281

FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591,

1931, 2281

FILMNET 1141

FINLANDIA 0451, 2321

FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491,

0521, 0781, 0811,

0871, 1081, 1411,

1421, 1981, 2051,

2091, 2121, 2151,

2551

FIRST LINE 1981

FISHER 0021, 0091, 0141,

0511, 0601, 0801,

0821, 0981, 1021,

1081, 1981, 2091

FORGESTONE 2281

FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761,

1081, 1451, 1541,

1981

FORMENTI-PHOENIX

0021, 0431, 0451,

0591, 1411

FORTRESS 1081

FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981

FUJITSU 1261

FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171,

1181, 1261

FUTURETECH 1171

GBC 0021, 0141, 1321,

1511, 1621, 1981

GEC 0451, 1101, 1281,

2321

GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581,

0601, 1101, 1281,

1561

GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451,

1321, 1511, 1621,

1981

GENERAL TECHNIC

2681

GENEXXA 0451, 1331

GOLDSTAR 0591, 0601, 0761,

0791, 1371, 1491,

1511, 1561, 1621,

1641

GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371,

1641, 2301

GORENJE 0981, 1061

GRAETZ 0451

GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491,

0581, 0601, 1101,

1111, 1351, 1981,

2321

GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141,

0451, 0491, 0581,

0601, 1031, 1311,

1521, 1561, 1641

GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471,

0491, 0711, 0741,

1381, 2021, 2041,

2141, 2151

HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141,

0431, 0591, 1561

HANTAREX 0581

HEMMERMANN 0061

HIFIVOX 0331, 0571

HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451,

1261, 1351, 1511,

1641, 1981, 2011

HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031,

0081, 0141, 0291,

0331, 0341, 0451,

0601, 0631, 0701,

1281, 1561, 1601,

1821, 1831, 1841,

1861, 1871, 1881,

1891, 1941, 1981,

2051, 2321, 2341

HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511,

1621

IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811,

0981, 1401, 1611,

1621, 2201, 2251,

2271

INGERSOL 1511

INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841,

1101, 1331, 1371,

1511, 2011

INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2711, 2721,

2761, 2771, 2781

INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061,

0121, 0181, 0451,

0491, 1081, 1641,

1791, 1821, 1981,

2231

IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331,

1371, 1411, 1511,

2011

ISUKAI 1331

ITT 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431

ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431

JVC (VICTOR) 0071, 0721, 1441,

1581, 1591, 1741,

1791

KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331

KAMOSONIC 0601

KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841,

1091, 1321, 1511,

1561, 2051

KAWASHO 0761

KENDO 0261

KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951,

1981

KONKA 2701

KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021,

1081, 1541

08V530RDS_code(GB) 1/18/02, 11:05 PM1

KTV 0601, 1171

LENOIR 0601, 1511

LEYEO 1181

LIFETEC 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2671, 2681,

2691, 2711, 2761,

2771, 2781

LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581,

0611, 1081

LOGIC 1691, 2281

LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281

LOWEWE 0831

LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901

LUXMAN 0791

LUXMAN STEREO TUNER

0791

LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181,

0341, 0421, 0451,

0461, 0491, 0601,

0671, 1351, 1371,

1561, 1601, 1911,

1921, 1981

LYCO 1181

MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261,

0581, 0641, 0771,

1021, 1081, 1621,

1981

MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581,

0591, 0641, 0761,

1091, 2001

MANESTH 0101

MARANTZ 0101

MARELLI 1081

MARK 0101

MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601,

0691, 1101, 1151,

1241, 1271, 1301,

1511, 1561, 1681,

1691

MAXIMAL 0071, 1981

MCMICHAEL 1281

MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2671, 2681,

2691, 2711, 2721,

2761, 2771, 2781

MEMOREX 1511

METZ 0231, 0741, 1001,

1041, 1081, 1481,

2071, 2081

MGA 1231

MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641,

2651, 2711, 2761,

2771, 2781

MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491,

1381, 2141, 2151

MISTRAL 2281

MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231,

0661, 1191, 1201,

1231, 1671, 1691,

1741

MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581,

0591, 0761, 0771,

1371, 1431, 2031

MTC 0791

MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601,

0641, 0981, 1321,

1511

MURPHY 0451, 2091

MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031

N.E.I. 0101, 0961

NAD 1341

NEC 0141, 1711, 1721,

1731

NECKERMANN 0451, 0601,

0981, 1081,

1561, 1931,

1981, 2211,

2231, 2241

NEDIATOR 0101

NICAMAGIC 0761

NIKKAI 1101, 1331, 1641,

1701, 2011

NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591,

0641, 1381, 1411

NOGAMATIC 0571

NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431, 2461, 2791

NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331,

0451, 0531, 0541,

0571, 1051, 1131,

1591, 1791, 1811,

1821, 1891, 1941,

2631

OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981

OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321,

0441, 1661

ONCEAS 0601

ONWA 1171

ORION 0061, 0391, 0691,

0851, 1211, 1241,

1251, 1301, 1481,

1511, 1681, 1691,

1981, 2371, 2421

OSAKA 2011

OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011

OSUME 0151

OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121,

0141, 0221, 0601,

1561, 1741, 1981

PAEL 0591, 1411

PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211,

0451, 0701, 1311,

1751, 1961, 2561,

2741

PANORAMIC 2351

PATHE MARCONI 0571

PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591,

1621, 1661, 1971

PAUSA 1511

PAUZA 1511

PERDIO 0891, 1101

PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811,

0981, 1021, 1081,

1401, 1611, 1621,

1751, 2201, 2251,

2271, 2451, 2471

PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591,

0621, 0681, 0751,

0761, 1021, 1081,

1281, 2031, 2281,

2291, 2431, 2441,

2511, 2731

PHOENIX 1081

PHONOLA 0751, 1081

PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341,

1821

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0411, 0451,

0491, 0581, 1411

PRANDONI-PROMCE 0451,

0491, 0581

PRIMA 0451

PROFEX 1981

PROTECH 0641, 1181, 1981

QUELLE 0041, 0061, 0121,

0221, 0231, 0391,

0491, 0521, 0601,

0781, 1371, 1381,

1411, 1421, 1641,

1681, 2051, 2091,

2141, 2151, 2201,

2211, 2231, 2241,

2251, 2271, 2551,

2571, 2581

REDIOMARELLI 0101, 0451,

0661, 0771, 1081

RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091

RADIOLA 2291

RANK 0481, 2151

RBM 2131, 2151

RBM (UK) 0481

REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641,

1981, 2331

REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081,

1031

REX 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

RFT 0991, 2511

ROADSTAR 1321, 1511

ROTEL 0151

SABA 0291, 0331, 0421,

0451, 0531, 0541,

0571, 0581, 0651,

0731, 0931, 1021,

1071, 1081, 1131,

1791, 1811, 1821,

1891, 1941, 2631

SACCS 1971

SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161,

1241, 1301, 1511,

1671, 1681, 1691

SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061,

0071, 0341, 0451,

0671, 1291, 1351,

1521, 1561, 1601,

1641, 1911, 1921,

1931, 1981, 2321

SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581,

0641, 1091, 1371,

1411, 2001

SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841,

0981, 1101, 1181,

1371, 1511, 2011

SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401,

0601, 0801, 0821,

0981, 1021, 1101,

1111, 1291, 1351,

1691, 1741, 2051,

2091, 2551

SBR 0681, 0751, 1281,

2281

SCHAUB LORENZ 0451

SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091,

0451, 0511, 0591,

0601, 0751, 1321,

1361, 1621, 1641,

2101, 2111, 2291

SCOTT 1171, 1261

SEG 0261, 0601, 0821,

0991

SEI 0641, 0691, 1081,

1301, 1481, 1981

SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

SENTRA 1601

SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191,

1761, 1781

SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581,

0641, 1021, 1081,

1981

SICATEL 1971

SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231,

0451, 0741, 2011,

2201, 2211, 2221,

2231, 2241, 2261,

2571, 2581

SILVER 1181

SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021,

1081

SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101,

0261, 0391, 0641,

0691, 0851, 0941,

1021, 1081, 1241,

1301, 1321, 1481,

1631, 1981

SKANTIC 0451

SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011

SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511

SONY 0141, 0171, 1121,

1681, 1691, 2751

SOUNDESIGN 1171

SSS 1171

STERN 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

SUNKAI 0691

SUPRA 0791

TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611,

1021, 1421, 1771,

1791, 2081

TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331,

1531

TASHIKO 0141

TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601,

0971, 1101, 1681,

1691

TCM 2621, 2641, 2711,

2761, 2771, 2781

TECHNICS 1311

TECHWOOD 0791

TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261

TELE 1141

TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731,

1821

TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311,

0551, 0731, 1131,

1471, 1591, 1791,

1801, 1811, 1821,

1991, 2161, 2171,

2181, 2191, 2201,

2251, 2271, 2521,

2631

TELETECH 1511

TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401,

2411

TENSAI 1331, 2091

TEXET 0601

THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531,

0571, 0631, 0651,

0731, 0901, 1241,

1571, 1591, 1791,

1811, 1821, 1891,

1941, 2531

THORN 0741, 0861, 2091,

2251, 2271, 2281

08V530RDS_code(GB) 1/18/02, 11:05 PM2

THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371,

0551, 0651, 0781,

0861, 0881, 1131,

1181, 1361, 1461,

1971, 1991, 2281

TMK 0141, 0791, 1471

TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481,

1221, 1271, 1701,

1741, 1851, 2151,

2801, 2811

TRANS CONTINENS

0451

TRISTAR 2281

TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121

UHER 0431, 0451, 0481,

0491, 0511, 1311,

1541

ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591,

1021, 1081, 1981

UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051

UNIVOX 1971

VEGAVOX 0811

VEXA 0101, 1511

VIDEOTON 2481

VORTEC 0101, 0651

VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491,

1021, 1081

WALTHAM 0451

WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241

WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261,

0591, 0641, 0761,

1091, 1971, 1981,

2001

WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981

WEGA COLOR 1021

WELTBLICK 0101

WESTON 1621

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0101, 0261, 0431,

0591, 0761, 1401,

1541

YOKO 0601, 1511

ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

ZOPPAS 0451

CABLE TV

CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476

CLYDE CABLEVISION

1426

FILMNET 1396, 1436

FRANCE TELECOM 1386

GEC 1426

JERROLD 1416

MOVIE TIME 1466

NSC 1466

PHILIPS 1386

PIONEER 0006

SAMSUNG 1496

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

1486, 1506

STARCOM 1416

STS 1466

TANDBERG 1366

TELE 1436

TELE +1 1436

TELESERVICE 1406, 1476

TUDI 1376

UNITED CABLE 1416

ZENITH 1406

SATELLITE TUNER

AKAI 1276

ALBA 0826, 1276

AMSTRAD 0166, 0796, 1016,

1026, 1296

ANKARO 0476

AST 0406

ASTRA 0126

BARCOM 0476

BLAUPUNKT 0966

BMC SATELLITE 0106

BRITISH TELECOM 1276

BUSH 0826

BUSH (UK) 0956

CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276

CANAL PLUS (FRANCE)

1536

CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006

COLUMBUS 0616

CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426

DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866

DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476

DRAKE 1516

ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606,

0626, 0666, 0926,

0996, 1046, 1056,

1066, 1106

ELTA 1286

ELTA SAT 0146

EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246

FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186,

0296, 0846, 0956,

1306

FINLUX 0976

FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776

FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636,

1056

GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336

GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956,

0966

HIGH PERFORMANCE

0916

HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966

HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706,

0946

ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886

ITT 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156

ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156

JEEMON 0146

JERROLD 0846, 0986

JOHANSSON 0246

JVC 1276

KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276,

0366

KOSMOS 0266

KYOSTAR 1036, 1086

LENG 0246

LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356

LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446,

0466, 0506, 1156

MACAB 0356

MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256,

0956

MEDION 1326, 1346

METZ 0966

MICROMAXX 1326, 1346

MITSUBISHI 0966

MORGANS 0596

MURATTO 0406

NEC 0286, 0316, 0766,

0786, 0836

NETWORK 0046

NIKKO 1136, 1146

NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156, 1166,

1336

NORSAT 0786

OTTO VERSAND 0966

PACE 0046, 0176, 0296,

0936, 0956, 1306,

1566, 1576

PACE MSS 0946

PACE SKY DIGITAL BOX (UK)

1526

PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706

PALSAT 0396

PALTEC 0706

PANASONIC 0806, 1306

PANSAT 1076

PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476,

0956, 1126, 1186,

1196, 1206, 1216,

1306, 1316

PROSAT 1176

PTT TELECOM

0306, 0896

QUELLE 0966

RADIX 1056

REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786

RFT 1186, 1196, 1206,

1216

SAGEM 1256, 1546

SAKURA 0566, 0816

SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136,

0446, 0456, 0486,

0496, 0576

SAMSUNG 0746, 0756

SAT 0406

SATCOM 0896

SATECO 0646

SECTOR 1266

SEDEA 1096

SENTRA 0416

SIEMENS 0896, 0966

SINTRACK 0906

SKYLAB 0476

SKYSCAN 0876

SONY 0736, 0946

STELLA 0306

STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036,

1086

STV 0636

TANDBERG 1116

TANDY 0916

TANTEC 0616

TATUNG 0516, 0546

TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526,

0556, 1056

TELECOM 0306

TELEMAX 0586

THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076,

0176, 0186, 0956

TOSHIBA 0946

TPS (FRANCE) 1546

TRIAD 0406

UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676,

0716, 0726

US ELECTRONICS 0886

VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076

VTECH 0436

WINERSAT 0246

WISI 0056, 0356, 0376,

0386, 0406, 0656,

1056, 1156

WOLSEY 0916

XCOM MULTIMEDIA

1556

XSAT (FRANCE) 1556

ZEHNDER 0266, 0406

ZENDER 0406

VCR

AIWA 0042, 0352, 0432

AKAI 0042, 0422, 0492,

0582, 0612, 0642,

0652, 0762, 0912

ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282,

0332, 0342, 0972

AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452

ANITECH 0002

ANITSCH 1002

ASA 0012, 0052

AUDIOSONIC 0002

BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492

BANG & OLUFSEN 0042

BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812

BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252,

0462, 0672, 0992

BRIONVEGA 0032

BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332,

0342, 0512, 0972

BUSH (UK) 0812

CAPEHART 0112

CGE 0042, 0432, 0762

CRAIG 0072, 0482

CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622

DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622

DANSAI 0012

DAYTRON 0112

DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432,

0942

DECCA (UK) 0052

DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432,

0532, 0602

DIXI 0442

DUAL 0042, 0632

DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532

DYNATECH 0432

DYNATRON 0012

ELBE 0122

ELIN 0072

EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202,

0432, 0512, 0522

ERRES 0012

FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722,

0852, 0902, 1012,

1022, 1082

FIDELITY 0432

FINLANDIA 0052, 0532

FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052,

0082, 0262, 0382,

0432, 0462, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0602,

0912

FIRST LINE 0002, 0912

FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532,

0542, 0572, 0592

FORMENTI-PHOENIX

0012, 0052

FRONTECH 0112

FUNAI 0432

GBC 0002

GEC (UK) 0022, 0052

GELOSO 0002

GENERAL TECHNIC 1172

GOLDSTAR 0012, 0122, 0812,

0952

GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282,

0432, 0502

GOODMANS (UK) 0002

GRAETZ 0022, 0042

GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532,

0572

III

08V530RDS_code(GB) 1/18/02, 11:05 PM3

GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092,

0462, 0602, 0812,

0822

GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092,

0232, 0252, 0262,

0752, 0802

HANSEATIC 0052, 0812

HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922

HCM 0002

HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412,

0442, 0522

HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292,

0432, 0602, 0662,

0812, 1022

IMPERIAL 0072, 0432

INGERSOL 0442

INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072

INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172

INTERFUNK 0022, 0052

IRRADIO 0002, 0012

ITT 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762

ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762

JENSEN 0042

JVC (VICTOR) 0042, 0102, 0142,

0272, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0902

KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812

KENDO 0492

KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572

LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172

LLOYD 0432

LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152

LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442

LUMA 0162

LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812

M ELECTRONIC

0432

MAGNADYNE 0052

MAGNASONIC

0572

MANESTH 0012

MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092,

0122, 0502

MARK 0012

MARTA 0012

MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512,

0522, 0812, 0972

MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172

MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432,

0482, 0532, 0572

METZ 0062, 0092, 0932

MGA 0912

MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172

MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252

MINOLTA 0172, 0602

MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142,

0912, 0922

MTC 0072, 0432

MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062,

0282, 0432

MURPHY 0432

N.E.I. 0012, 0052

NATIONAL 0462

NEC 0042, 0122, 0142

NECKERMANN 0032, 0042,

0052, 0072,

0092, 0202,

0522, 0572,

0762, 0812

NIKKAI 0112

NOBLIKO 0092

NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762,

1152

NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142,

0192, 0222, 0242,

0392, 0402, 0632,

0732, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0792, 0832,

0842, 0872

OLYMPUS 0462

OPTONICA 0132, 0502

ORION 0162, 0202, 0312,

0442, 0512, 0522,

0982

OSAKA 0432

OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432

OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062,

0812

PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462,

0672, 0992, 1092,

1102, 1182

PENTAX 0172, 0602

PERDIO 0432

PHILCO 1062

PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092,

0152, 0182, 0362,

0372, 0382, 0472,

0502, 1072

PHONOLA 0052, 0152

PILOT 0012

PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372,

0472

PORTLAND 0112

PROLINE 0432

PYE 0052, 0152

QUARTZ 0572

QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042,

0052, 0062, 0072,

0092, 0202, 0462,

0522, 0942

RADIONETTE 0022

REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132,

0432, 0482, 0502,

0532, 0572

RET 1072

REX 0042, 0742, 0782

RICOH 0952

SABA 0042, 0142, 0192,

0222, 0242, 0392,

0632, 0732, 0742,

0762, 0772, 0782,

0792, 0872

SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292,

0442, 0512, 0522,

0972

SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812,

0822, 0912

SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622,

0652, 1192

SANSUI 0042, 0142

SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562,

0572

SBR 0052, 0152, 0182

SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042

SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052,

0072, 0432

SEG 0002, 0072

SEI-SINUDYNE 0442

SELECO 0042

SENTRA 0112

SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702

SHINTOM 0002

SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252,

0572

SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442,

0932

SONOKO 0282

SONY 0432, 0552, 0682,

0692, 0942, 0952,

0962, 1122, 1132

STS 0602

SUNKAI 0512

SUNSTAR 0432

SYLVANIA 0432, 0912

SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912

TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522,

0932

TASHIKO 0132, 0432

TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432,

0922

TCM 1142, 1162, 1172

TEAC 0042, 0432

TECHNICS 0462

TEKNIKA 0012, 0432

TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632,

0732, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0882, 0892

TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052

TENOSAL 0002

THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142,

0192, 0402, 0632,

0762

THORN 0042, 0902

THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222,

0302, 0712,

0722, 0742,

0762, 0852,

0862, 0872,

0902

TMK 0522

TONSAI 0002

TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912

TOTEVISION 0012, 0072

TRIUMPH 0922

UHER 0042, 0072

ULTRAVOX 0032

UNITECH 0072

VECTOR RESEARCH

0122

VIDEON 1162, 1172

WELTBLICK 0012

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0032

XENON 0162

YAMAHA 0042, 1202

YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072

DVD PLAYER

AKAI 0058

DENON 0188

HITACHI 0198

JVC 0088, 0178

KENWOOD 0148

MAGNAVOX 0128

MITSUBISHI 0138

ONKYO 0068, 0128

PANASONIC 0028

PHILIPS 0098, 0128

PIONEER 0108, 0118

PROSCAN 0158

RCA 0158

SAMSUNG 0078

SHARP 0038

SONY 0018

TECHNICS 0028

THOMSON 0168

TOSHIBA 0048, 0128

YAMAHA 0008, 0028, 0098

ZENITH 0128

LD PLAYER

AIWA 0137

FUNAI 0137

HITACHI 0047

MAGNAVOX 0077

PANASONIC 0027

PIONEER 0037

RCA 0067

REALISTIC 0137

SAMSUNG 0017, 0087

SONY 0057, 0097, 0107,

0117

VICTOR 0127

YAMAHA 0007

CD PLAYER

ACCUPHASE 0315

ADC 0865

ADCOM 0785, 1015

AKAI 0115, 0125, 0725,

0735, 0745, 0935,

1155

ARCAM 1875

ARCAM-ROTEL 0165

AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835

AUDIOSONIC 0155

AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245,

1765, 1915, 1935

BSR 0875

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB

1075

CARRERA 0555, 0875

CARVER 0825, 1415

CYRUS-ROTEL 0205

DENON 0045, 0955, 1045,

1595, 1795, 1805

DUAL 1005

ELIN 0185

EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675

FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605,

0825, 1165, 1175

GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855,

0875, 0995, 1265,

1285, 1345, 1355,

1485, 1575, 1675,

1715, 1825

GOLDSTAR 0555, 1185, 1195,

1585

GRUNDIG 0175

HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495,

0565, 1135, 1145,

1155

HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685,

0945, 1005, 1015,

1225, 1545

INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015

ITT-NOKIA 0185

JVC (VICTOR) 0385, 0395, 0455,

0575, 0585

KARCHER 0485

KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145,

0215, 0595, 0675,

0695, 0705, 0715,

0925, 1355, 1485,

1575, 1675, 1715,

1825

KORTING 0175

LIFETEC 2015

LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645,

1655, 1665

LINN 0165, 1875

LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795,

0805, 1295, 1305,

1555, 1925

08V530RDS_code(GB) 1/18/02, 11:05 PM4

LUXOR 0185, 1895, 1905

MAGNAVOX 1865, 1875

MARANTZ 0165, 0175, 0545,

0665, 1275, 1335,

1405, 1505, 1875,

1955

MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605

MCS 0535

MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005,

2015

MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265,

1275, 1285, 1675

MGA 1125

MICROMAXX 2015

MISSION 0165, 1875

MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205

NAD 0135, 0255, 0285,

0295, 0305, 0345,

0755, 0765, 1315,

1325

NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565

NEC 0405, 0535, 0775,

0785

NECKERMAN 0155, 0225

NIKKO 0835, 1165

OCEANIC 0185

OKANO 0155, 0225

ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425,

1455, 1515

PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615,

1625

PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195,

1865, 1875

PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425,

0435, 0445, 0525,

0855, 1035, 1945

PROTON 0905, 1875

QUASAR 1075

RADIOLA 1845, 1855

RADIOTONE 0485

REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265,

1275, 1285, 1575

ROTEL 1875

SABA 1005

SAE 1875

SALORA 0185

SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975,

0985, 1255, 1675,

1875

SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845,

0915

SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855

SCOTT 1285, 1675

SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025,

1115, 1275, 1635,

1785, 1815, 1825,

1835

SHERWOOD 1275, 1445

SIEMENS 1085

SIGNATURE 1155

SONY 0345, 0355, 0365,

0375, 0865, 1685,

1695, 1705, 1715,

1725, 1735, 1745

SYLVANIA 1875

TANDBERG 1885

TASHIKO 1525

TCM 1985, 2015

TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275,

1365, 1375, 1395,

1435, 1465, 1475

TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065,

1075, 1625

TELEFUNKEN 1005

THETA DIGITAL 1865

THOMSON 1005

TOSHIBA 0755, 0765

VECTOR RESEARCH

0555, 0865

YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085,

0345, 0615, 0655,

0815, 0835, 0895,

1815

CD RECORDER/CD-RW

HITACHI 0304

JVC 0334

MARANTZ 0314, 0324

PHILIPS 0274

PIONEER 0284, 0294

YAMAHA 0244

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0214

SHARP 0264

PIONEER 0254

SONY 0224

YAMAHA 0024, 0224, 0234

TAPE DECK

AKAI 0124

DENON 0204

GRUNDIG 0134

HARMAN 0044

JVC 0194

KENWOOD 0164

KORTING 0134

LUXMAN 0054, 0064, 0074,

0084

MARANTZ 0134, 0144

NAD 0174

ONKYO 0184

PHILIPS 0134, 0144, 0154

PIONEER 0034, 0114

SONY 0094, 0104

YAMAHA 0004, 0014

08V530RDS_code(GB) 1/18/02, 11:05 PM5

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

V874610

RX-V530RDS

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

RX-V530RDS

AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

0100V530(GB)-cv1/4 1/18/02, 8:44 PM1

Documenttranscriptie

GB RX-V530RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V530(GB)-cv1/4 1 RX-V530RDS AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia V874610 1/18/02, 8:44 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 10 cm at the back of this unit — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 3 4 5 6 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/or liquid drops inside this unit. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CAUTION 0101V530_Cau_EN(GB) 2 1/18/02, 6:39 PM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ............................................................ 1 FEATURES ............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3 Checking the package contents ................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ................................................. 9 Speakers .................................................................... 9 Speaker placement .................................................... 9 Connecting the speakers .......................................... 10 Before connecting components ............................... 13 Connecting video components ................................ 14 Connecting audio components ................................ 16 Connecting the antennas ......................................... 17 Connecting an external decoder .............................. 18 Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 18 Turning on the power .............................................. 19 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 20 ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .. 21 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 48 Control area ............................................................. 48 Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 49 Clearing setup manufacturer codes ......................... 49 Controlling other components ................................. 50 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ....................................................... 51 ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME ..................... 52 ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC MUSIC ......................... 53 Changing parameter settings ................................... 53 PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions ....... 53 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADVANCED OPERATION Using the test tone ................................................... 21 Adjusting the items on the SET MENU .................. 42 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 43 2 LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 45 3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) ................... 45 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 46 5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and right speakers) ..................................................... 46 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 46 7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .............. 46 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 47 9 DISPLAY SET .................................................... 47 10MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ........................ 47 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13 SET MENU ........................................................... 42 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................ 4 Remote control .......................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 INTRODUCTION ADVANCED OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 54 GLOSSARY .......................................................... 58 SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 60 BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................ 23 Input modes and indications .................................... 25 Selecting a sound field program .............................. 26 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ................................................................. 29 Understanding sound fields ..................................... 29 Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 29 CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 30 Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 30 CINEMA-DSP programs ........................................ 32 TUNING ................................................................ 34 Automatic and manual tuning ................................. 34 Presetting stations .................................................... 35 Tuning in to a preset station .................................... 37 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37 RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ........................... 38 Description of RDS data ......................................... 38 Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 38 PTY SEEK function ................................................ 39 EON function .......................................................... 39 SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 40 Setting the sleep timer ............................................. 40 Canceling the sleep timer ........................................ 40 English RECORDING ....................................................... 41 1 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1 1/18/02, 6:39 PM FEATURES Built-in 5-channel power amplifier Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Main: 75 W + 75 W Center: 75 W Rear: 75 W + 75 W [Other models] Main: 65 W + 65 W Center: 65 W Rear: 65 W + 65 W ◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset editing) Multi-mode digital sound field processing ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 decoder ◆ DTS/DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Other features ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ “SET MENU” for optimizing this unit for your Audio/Video system ◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance adjustment ◆ 6-channel external decoder input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes ■ About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 2 1/18/02, 6:39 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the package contents Check your package to make sure it contains the following items. Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Remote control AM loop antenna TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea and General models) A/V cable (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) (Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models) – MUTE PREPARATION + TV VOL EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E SELECT + BASIC OPERATION – TEST RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. 1 • Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in the operating range of the remote control, that the indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Press the part and slide off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into place. English 1 APPENDIX If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have been cleared. 3 3 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 ■ Notes on batteries ADVANCED OPERATION Installing batteries in the remote control 1/18/02, 6:39 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RDS MODE/FREQ STANDBY /ON EON PTY SEEK MODE START BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES 8 9 0 q w e r t y RDS MODE/FREQ + u – + i EON PTY SEEK MODE START op a s (U.K. and Europe model) 1 STANDBY/ON 4 INPUT MODE Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. When you turn this unit on, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is connected to two or more input jacks. Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source. Standby mode In this mode, this unit will consume a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 5 INPUT l / h Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 6 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the OUT (REC) level. 7 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. This audio takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 4 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 4 1/18/02, 6:39 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 8 9 STEREO/EFFECT Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. Selects the DSP program. q MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores the current station in the memory. w TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. Switches the reception band between FM and AM. r PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the colon (:) turns on or off). This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. o RDS MODE/FREQ (U.K. and Europe models) When an RDS station is received, press this button to change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data service) and/or frequency display mode in turn. p PTY SEEK MODE (U.K. and Europe models) Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. a PTY SEEK START (U.K. and Europe models) Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. s EON (U.K. and Europe models) Press this button to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to tune in to a radio program of that type automatically. ADVANCED OPERATION t PRESET/TUNING l / h BASIC OPERATION e FM/AM i TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the main left and right channels. Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the highfrequency response. PREPARATION 0 PROGRAM l / h u BASS Adjusts the low-frequency response for the main left and right channels. Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the lowfrequency response. INTRODUCTION SILENT (PHONES jack) Allows you enjoy DSP effect for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the speakers. Selects preset station numbers 1 to 8 when the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not appear. y A/B/C/D/E Selects preset station groups A to E. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 5 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 5 1/18/02, 6:39 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the remote control controls and their functions. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected before starting operation. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 48 to 50. 1 2 TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT 9 3 Input selector buttons 0 Select the input source and set the remote control to operate the selected source component. w A AMP B e r + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 LEVEL PRESET/CH 5 LEVEL 6 Multi control section y Used when changing the setting and to implement the settings. ENTERTAINMENT 7 TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. 8 TRANSMIT indicator u Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 9 STANDBY SET MENU MENU TITLE Select DSP programs for the AMP position. Press a button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that group. t EFFECT 5 4 DSP program Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted. MUTE 4 2 CODE SET Used when setting up the manufacturer code (see page 49). q VCR Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 8 POWER 3 1 Infrared window i Sets this unit in the standby mode. A/B/C/D/E 6 – SELECT + 7 0 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. TEST DISPLAY RETURN q SLEEP REC AUDIO Sets the sleep timer. DISC SKIP w 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. e AMP Sets the remote control to the AMP mode for controlling this unit. r Å/ı Sets the remote control to operate other components (not necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this unit’s input source. t VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. 6 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 6 1/18/02, 6:39 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS y MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. Using the remote control Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO EFFECT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES 30° i SET MENU INTRODUCTION u STEREO/EFFECT 30° + – + Approximately 6 m (20 feet) PREPARATION Selects the SET MENU mode. ■ Handling the remote control ADVANCED OPERATION • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. BASIC OPERATION The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 7 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 7 1/18/02, 6:39 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 2 MATRIX 3 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD MUTE VOLUME DTS DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC AUTO STEREO PS PTY RT CT MOVIE THTR 12 ENTERTAINMENT EON PTY HOLD TUNED MEMORY SLEEP VCR DIGITAL VIRTUAL SILENT PRO LOGIC / L DSP dB mS PCM 5 4 6 7 8 9 q w e r t 0 C R LFE RL RC RR y (U.K. and Europe models) 1 Processor indicators 9 Multi-information display Lights up when the t, g, VIRTUAL, PRO LOGIC / , DSP or MATRIX are activated. Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 2 Input source indicator 0 RDS indicator (U.K. and Europe models) Shows the current input source with a cursor. Indicates the volume level. The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON indicator lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD indicator lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 5 v indicator q STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. 6 SILENT indicator w TUNED indicator Lights up when headphones are connected while the digital sound field processor is on. Lights up when this unit is tuned to a station. e MEMORY indicator 7 Headphones indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. Lights up when headphones are connected. r AUTO indicator 8 DSP program indicators Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. t SLEEP indicator 3 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. 4 VOLUME level indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. y Input channel indicator Indicates the channel components of input signals being received. 8 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 8 1/18/02, 6:39 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speaker placement The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m (6 feet) Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance between each speaker and each side of the video monitor should also be the same. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the monitor) and centrally between the main speakers. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Main speaker (R) ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field Center speaker BASIC OPERATION The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. PREPARATION This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 5-speaker system, using main left and right speakers, rear left and right speakers and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. INTRODUCTION Speakers Note CAUTION APPENDIX • If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear and/or center), change the settings of SPEAKER SET items at the SET MENU to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers to. Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. English 9 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 9 1/18/02, 6:39 PM SPEAKER SETUP Connecting the speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/ or the speakers. If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 2 ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals 2 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 1 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. (U.S.A. model) y Banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China, Korea and General models) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. (U.S.A. model) ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals A front speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 10 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 10 1/18/02, 6:40 PM SPEAKER SETUP Main speaker Right Left 2 INTRODUCTION 1 Center speaker 3 CENTER DIGITAL INPUT 6CH INPUT AUDIO VIDEO MAIN + L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD V-AUX SURROUND – AM ANT CENTER IN PR/CR PB/CB Y DVD 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) MONITOR OUT DVD R MAIN L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT D-TV /CBL + MD/CD-R AC OUTLETS OUT CD AUDIO VIDEO SET BEFORE POWER ON IMPEDANCE SELECTOR MONITOR OUT OUTPUT L + DVD PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO GND VCR – SUB WOOFER – COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL SPEAKERS TUNER REAR (SURROUND) R MAIN CENTER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN CENTER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 4 BASIC OPERATION 5 L 6 Right Left Rear speaker Subwoofer system ADVANCED OPERATION 3 1 4 2 5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 6 The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening room. ■ SUBWOOFER jack Notes 11 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 11 1/18/02, 6:40 PM English • The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz. • If you do not use a subwoofer, designate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of SPEAKER SET item “1D BASS” on the SET MENU to MAIN. • Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote control (see “ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 51). APPENDIX When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. SPEAKER SETUP ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch WARNING Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the power of this unit is on, this may damage the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch all the way to either position when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. Switch position CENTER Speaker Impedance level Main The impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. + SPEAKERS – Left – – + MAIN SET BEFORE POWER ON IMPEDANCE SELECTOR L + R R REAR (SURROUND) MAIN CENTER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN CENTER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. L (U.S.A. model) Right Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 12 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 12 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. To enjoy multi-channel sound track of DVD software, etc. with DSP effect, you need to make digital connection. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between the components have been completed. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. PREPARATION • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. • The name of jack corresponds to input selector. INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting to digital jacks Before connecting components BASIC OPERATION DIGITAL INPUT jacks (pages 13-16) ADVANCED OPERATION Antenna input terminals (page 17) 6CH INPUT jacks (page 18) SPEAKERS terminals (pages 10-11) CENTER DIGITAL INPUT 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUDIO MAIN + L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD V-AUX SURROUND – IN COMPONENT VIDEO PR/CR VCR PB/CB Y – GND DVD OUT 75Ω UNBAL. MD/CD-R MONITOR OUT DVD R MAIN L R REAR (SURROUND) L L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT D-TV /CBL FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) + CD + DVD ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AM ANT CENTER SUB WOOFER – COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL SPEAKERS TUNER AUDIO AC OUTLETS (page 18) SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack (page 11) Audio component jacks (page 16) APPENDIX DIGITAL OUTPUT jack (page 16) VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUTPUT Video component jacks (pages 14-15) English 13 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 13 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting video components Refer to the connection examples on the next page. ■ Types of video jacks There are three types of video jacks as follows: COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO 2 1 PR/CR PB/CB Y 3 1 VIDEO jack Conventional composite video signal. 2 S VIDEO jack Transmits color and luminance separately and achives high-quality color reproduction. 3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks Transmit color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) and luminance separately and provide the best quality picture. • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are only output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks. • Use a commercially available cable specified for connecting each type of jacks. • The description of the component video jacks may differ depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). When using these jacks, refer also to the operation instructions for the component being connected. ■ Connecting a video monitor Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack. Note • If you connect this unit with a source component using S-video (or Component video) jacks, you also need to connect your video monitor using S-video (or Component video) jacks. y • If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component video signal output jacks on the component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • The AUDIO jacks are available for a video component which does not have optical digital output jack. However, multichannel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio signals input from AUDIO jacks. ■ Connecting another video component Connect the audio signal output jacks on your video component to the AUDIO jacks and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on this unit. ■ Connecting a VCR or DVR (digital video recorder) Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video component to the AUDIO OUT jacks and connect the video signal input jack on the video component to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for picture recording. Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component to the AUDIO IN jacks and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO IN jack on this unit to play a source from your recording component. y • If your video component has an S-video input, connect the S-video signal input jack on the component to the S VIDEO OUT jack. • If your video component has an S-video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO IN jack. Notes • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • S-video and component video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuit. Make sure to connect this unit to both a source component and a recording component using the video jacks of the same system. ■ Connecting a DVD player/digital TV/cable TV Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on this unit. Then connect AUDIO jacks on your component to the AUDIO jacks on this unit. 14 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 14 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS O OPTICAL OUTPUT Another video component VCR AUDIO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT R L L 6CH INPUT V R AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT L V TV/digital TV/ cable TV R V VIDEO OUTPUT V PREPARATION DIGITAL INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO MAIN L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD V-AUX SURROUND COAXIAL TUNER AM ANT CENTER SUB WOOFER OPTICAL D-TV/CBL IN COMPONENT VIDEO PR/CR PB/CB BASIC OPERATION GND VCR Y DVD DVD OUT CD 75Ω UNBAL. MONITOR OUT DVD L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT D-TV /CBL FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) MD/CD-R AUDIO INTRODUCTION L R VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION V V VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT O OPTICAL OUTPUT DVD player ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Video monitor indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video cables APPENDIX L English 15 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 15 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connecting a CD player Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack. y • The AUDIO jacks are available for a CD player which does not have coaxial digital output jack. ■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder y • The AUDIO jacks are available for an CD recorder or MD recorder which does not have optical digital input or output jack. Notes • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks. Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ CD-R jack for digital recording. Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R jack to play a source from your recording component. DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL OUTPUT CD player 6CH INPUT AUDIO VIDEO MAIN L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD C V-AUX SURROUND COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL TUNER AM ANT CENTER SUB WOOFER IN GND VCR DVD OUT CD 75Ω UNBAL. OPTICAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R O CD recorder or MD recorder DVD O OPTICAL INPUT FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT indicates signal direction C indicates coaxial cables O indicates optical cables 16 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 16 1/18/02, 6:40 PM VIDEO MONITOR OUT CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) EO VIDEO TUNER AM ANT PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. GND DVD 75Ω UNBAL. D-TV /CBL BASIC OPERATION FM ANT MONITO OUT VIDEO R OUT FREQUENCY STEP Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) 1 2 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. 3 FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models) FM/AM Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. 50kHz/9kHz Lead wire 100kHz/10kHz Cut the lead wire and remove it. 5 Clamp with pliers. Insert the wire into the slot. Snap the cover into place. FREQUENCY STEP English Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. 17 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 17 APPENDIX 4 Clamp with pliers. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. Unit: mm (inch) ADVANCED OPERATION Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor, or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes Connecting the power supply cords VOLTAGE SELECTOR VOLTAGE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 50W MAX. TOTAL • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except for “1E MAIN Lv”). (General model) ■ Connecting the AC power cord Plug in this unit to the wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and General models .............................................. 2 OUTLETS U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any source component connected to this unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the area which it was purchasing. China and General models ......................................... 50 W Other models ........................................................... 100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/ 220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 18 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 18 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS Turning on the power INTRODUCTION When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. 1 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + PREPARATION TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT BASIC OPERATION + TV VOL 1 – MUTE HALL 1 JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER or ADVANCED OPERATION STANDBY /ON Remote control Front panel The level of the main volume, and then the current DSP program name appear on the front panel display. 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 19 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 19 1/18/02, 6:40 PM SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS This unit has 5 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, see “1 SPEAKER SET” on pages 43-44 to change the settings. Summary of SPEAKER SET items 1A through 1E Item Description Possible settings (default setting indicated in bold) 1A CENTER Sets center speaker availability and size. LRG/SML/NON 1B MAIN Sets main speaker size. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR LR Sets rear L/R speakers availability and size. LRG/SML/NON 1D BASS Sets the speaker(s) to be used to output low bass signals. 1E MAIN Lv Sets the main speaker level. SWFR/MAIN/BOTH Nrm (Normal)/–10 dB 20 0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 20 1/18/02, 6:40 PM ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Note 3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the front panel to the center position and adjust the volume of this unit so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard (in order) from the main left speaker, center speaker, main right speaker, rear right speaker, rear left speaker, and the subwoofer. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds from each speaker. + VOLUME – or Using the test tone BASS – TREBLE + Remote control + – BASIC OPERATION Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the speakers. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position using the remote control. PREPARATION VOLUME • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. Front panel 3 LEFT RIGHT VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE INTRODUCTION This section explains how to adjust speaker output levels using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is complete, the output level heard at the listening position should be the same from each speaker. This is important for best performance of the digital sound field processor, and the various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic and DTS). 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER CENTER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – + – + ADVANCED OPERATION STEREO PHONES *SUBWOOFER 3 AMP VCR A + + + TV CH VOLUME TV VOL B – TV INPUT – L SUR. * Subwoofer test tone is output after the rear left speaker (LEFT SURROUND). MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 The front panel display shows which speaker is outputting the test tone. EFFECT LEVEL 4 2,5 PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE Note A/B/C/D/E – R SUR. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – TV MUTE 1 3 SELECT + TEST • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this unit to standby mode and check the speaker connections. DISPLAY RETURN 1 Press AMP. 2 Press TEST to output the test tone. APPENDIX AMP TEST RETURN English 21 0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 21 1/18/02, 6:40 PM ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS 4 Adjust the level of the effect speakers using j / i so that it matches the level of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. PRESET/CH – SELECT + Note • To adjust the level of the main speakers, use VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on the remote control). 5 When adjustment is complete, press TEST to stop the test tone. TEST RETURN Notes • If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON and the center speaker is not connected, the center channel sound is automatically output from the main left and right speakers. • If “1C REAR LR” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the output level of the rear left and right speakers cannot be adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the rear right and left speakers. • If “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN, the test tone will be circulated skipping the subwoofer. y • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker levels once they are set (as long as you do not change the speakers). You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source at the desired volume simply by adjusting the VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on the remote control). • If the output level of the effect speakers (center, rear left, and rear right) cannot be increased enough to match the level of the main speakers, set “1E MAIN Lv” on SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 44). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1E MAIN Lv” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. 22 0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 22 1/18/02, 6:40 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 3 5 3 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS 3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. The selected input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display for a few seconds. CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING FM/AM INTRODUCTION 1 A/B/C/D/E INPUT EFFECT EDIT – PHONES + – + or 6 5 Front panel Remote control TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME 3 L R 5 Selected input source MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 6 ENTER EFFECT 1 SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT or Front panel Remote control Front panel 2 Remote control ADVANCED OPERATION Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. To select the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks (When combining with a video source) • You need to select the input to which the video source component is connected before selecting audio source. Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION CD DVD 3 PREPARATION VCR Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Note • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source, first press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display. APPENDIX English 23 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 23 1/18/02, 6:41 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 4 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. Adjust the volume to the desired level. The volume level is displayed digitally. Example: –70 dB Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to 0 dB (maximum) The volume level indicator also shows the current volume level as a bar graph. If desired, use BASS and TREBLE. These controls only effect the sound from the main speakers. ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to enjoy video images from a video source together with sounds from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from a video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group, then select a source from the audio group using the input selector buttons on the remote control. BGV selections cannot be made with INPUT l / h on the front panel. VOLUME CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + or VOLUME – BASS – TREBLE + – ■ To mute the sound 1 Remote control + Front panel • You can also cancel mute by pressing VOLUME +/–, etc. • During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front panel display. Notes Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 29 to 33 for details about DSP programs. When using the remote control, press AMP before selecting a DSP program. PROGRAM or HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 ■ When you have finished using this unit 1 Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby mode. STANDBY STANDBY /ON or Front panel ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Front panel Remote control 24 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) MUTE y • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left and right speakers. • If you have connected a recording component to the VCR OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or low volume during playback of other components, try turning the recording component on. 6 Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. 24 1/18/02, 6:41 PM Remote control BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on 96-kHz sampling digital signals Input modes and indications Each time you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” setting on the SET MENU (see page 47 for details). 1 CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP INPUT MODE or Front panel V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME DVD AUTO L R Input mode AUTO: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes APPENDIX • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a moment when playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is selected again. • When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. ADVANCED OPERATION In this mode, the input signal is selected automatically as follows: 1) Digital signal 2) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected, even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected, even if a digital signal is input at the same time. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – This unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after having detected the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS source can be played. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed during playback of a DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. BASIC OPERATION VCR Remote control ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs PREPARATION Press INPUT MODE (the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display. The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note the following when 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: – DSP programs cannot be selected. – Sound will be output as 2-channel stereo from only the main left and right speakers. (There may be sound output from the subwoofer depending on the SPEAKER MODE settings on the SET MENU.) Therefore, the level of the effect speakers cannot be adjusted while listening to such a source. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with a variety input jacks. You can select the type of input signals you desire. English 25 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 25 1/18/02, 6:41 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a sound field program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. For details about each program, see pages 29 to 33. After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to select the desired sub-program if available. Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly switches the sub-program between “Sci-Fi” and “Spectacle”. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 ENTERTAINMENT STANDBY /ON 5 BASS 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING /DTS SUR. A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – 9 + ENTER EFFECT PROGRAM l / h Program name TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME DIGITAL MOVIE THTR 1 DSP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 DGTLzSci-Fi L C R LFE RL RR Sub-program name Notes MUTE ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 • There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal formats. • The digital sound field processor cannot be used when a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected or when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC Movie, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers.) ENTERTAINMENT 2,3 EFFECT 1 Press AMP. 2 Press one of the DSP program buttons on the remote control to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display. AMP HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Program name VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME DIGITAL MOVIE THTR 1 DSP DGTL Spectacle Sub-program name y L C R LFE RL RR • You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel. • Select a program based on your listening preference. Program names are just for reference. 26 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 26 1/18/02, 6:41 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Selecting PRO LOGIC 4 HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 VOLUME INPUT Press SELECT repeatedly to select the decoder; PRO LOGIC or PRO LOGIC . INPUT M0DE ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER /DTS SUR. 9 STANDBY /ON ENTER EFFECT BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E 5 EDIT – PHONES + – + TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + + TV CH VOLUME TV VOL – TV INPUT 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 2 9 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT y JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 9 ROCK CONCERT 2 – HALL /DTS SUR. JAZZ CLUB 1 /DTS SUR. MUTE 3,4,5 HALL • You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Movie, and PRO LOGIC Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. ENTER EFFECT 1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press AMP. 3 Press q/DTS SUR. The previously selected sub program appears on the front panel display. AMP ROCK CONCERT JAZZ CLUB ENTERTAINMENT 2 3 4 MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 9 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 TV SPORTS /DTS SUR. ADVANCED OPERATION HALL ENTER EFFECT Remote control VCR BASIC OPERATION – TV MUTE POWER PREPARATION PROGRAM l / h After selecting on the decoder (PRO LOGIC ), select the mode appropriate for the source by pressing q/DTS SUR. The selection switches as follow; PRO LOGIC Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music INTRODUCTION You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC in program No. 9. V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R PRO LOGIC TUNER CD VOLUME PRO LOGIC / PRO LOGIC L APPENDIX DSP R English 27 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 27 1/18/02, 6:41 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Playing Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP Press MATRIX 6.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder. MATRIX MATRIX 6.1 VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER DIGITAL MOVIE THTR 1 +10 Spectacle 6.1 DSP The MATRIX indicator lights up. The display changes AUTO → Matrix6.1 → OFF each time the MATRIX 6.1 button is pressed. AUTO: Matrix6.1: OFF: This mode automatically switches Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 and DTS + Matrix 6.1 depending on the signal. Virtual rear center speaker does not work for 5.1 channel sources. This setting produces 6-channel playback of the input source using the Matrix 6.1 decoder. The virtual rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1-channel source. Virtual rear center speaker does not work in this setting. You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you could expert from actual speakers with SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When sound effects are off, you listen to the source with normal stereo reproduction.) Notes • This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the headphone. ■ Normal Stereo Reproduction 1 Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back on. STEREO STEREO or ENTER EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Notes • The setting becomes AUTO once this unit turns into standby mode. • Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software may not contain the signal that is necessary for this unit to switch to the Matrix 6.1 decoding mode. To turn on the Matrix 6.1 decoder when playing such a source, select “Matrix6.1”. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C REAR LR” in the SET MENU to NON. Sound field processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP automatically. Note • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 5ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic Normal, Pro Logic , or DTS Normal program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. Notes • If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the center speaker, rear speakers. • If you turn off the sound effects while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effects or if you set “4 D. RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. • The sound of LFE channel will be directed to the main left and right or the subwoofer (or both) channels depending on the setting of “1D BASS” on the SET MENU. y During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the components connected to this unit. (While playing a source) 1 2 Press AMP. Press d to display the information about the input signal. PRESET/CH – SELECT 28 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 28 1/18/02, 6:41 PM + DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) PREPARATION A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. INTRODUCTION Understanding sound fields ■ Recreating a sound field BASIC OPERATION Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires three effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the three effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener. Hi-Fi DSP programs No. Program ADVANCED OPERATION The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Features A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT/ Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. ENTERTAINMENT/ 5ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties, etc. APPENDIX CONCERT HALL ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 English 29 0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 29 1/18/02, 6:42 PM CINEMA-DSP Sound design of CINEMA-DSP Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD DIALOG EFFECT MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder for adding a rear center channel (the rear center channel is outputted from virtual rear center speaker). You can select CINEMA-DSP programs to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source. 30 0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 30 1/18/02, 6:43 PM CINEMA-DSP ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + Matrix 6.1 + DSP sound field effect ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Surround DSP sound field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Dolby Pro Logic ADVANCED OPERATION Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right, and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. Presence DSP sound field BASIC OPERATION These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the virtual rear center speaker. PREPARATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround, and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digitalor DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field INTRODUCTION The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater. Dolby Pro Logic decodes Dolby Surround software into 5 discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2 channels in rear). There are 2 modes; MOVIE for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel audio sources. APPENDIX English 31 0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 31 1/18/02, 6:43 PM CINEMA-DSP CINEMA-DSP programs ■ For movie programs: No. 7 to 9 This unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern according to the input signal format. Table of Program Names for Each Input Format Input No. 2 channel 5.1 channel 6.1 channel * Stereo DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DOLBY DIGITAL Matrix 6.1 DTS Matrix 6.1 70 mm Spectacle DGTL Spectacle DTS Spectacle Spectacle 6.1 Spectacle 6.1 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi 6.1 Sci-Fi 6.1 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure DTS Adventure Adventure 6.1 Adventure 6.1 70 mm General DGTL General DTS General General 6.1 General 6.1 — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 — — — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 Normal — — — — Enhanced — — — — Movie — — — — Music — — — — Program 7 8 9 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DIGITAL SUR PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC * means the Matrix 6.1 decoder is ON. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will automatically switch to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the MATRIX 6.1 button on the remote control, the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP program is selected. • MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with the virtual rear center speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel. • When playing a 6.1 channel source with MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control turned off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel. Notes • The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting program No. 9 except in Enhanced mode. • When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, main and rear speakers output effect sounds. 32 0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 32 1/18/02, 6:43 PM CINEMA-DSP The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. 7 This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. Enhanced Mode ■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6 No. Features This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. ENTERTAINMENT/ Concert Video This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to concert video sounds. 5 TV SPORTS With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. APPENDIX ENTERTAINMENT/ Game ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 Program ADVANCED OPERATION This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. BASIC OPERATION 9 MOVIE THEATER 2 Spectacle PREPARATION 8 Features Program MOVIE THEATER 1 INTRODUCTION No. English 33 0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 33 1/18/02, 6:43 PM TUNING 4 Automatic and manual tuning There are 2 ways to tune; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. PRESET/TUNING VCR ■ Automatic tuning V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED A AM 144O 1 When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER y STANDBY /ON BASS • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. TREBLE SILENT STEREO EFFECT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. 3 2 3 4 1 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatic tuning” at left. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. Press INPUT l / h (TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. SYSTEM INPUT or STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT POWER POWER TV AV CD DVD TUNING MODE Front panel AUTO VCR A B AUTO/MAN'L MONO AMP Goes off If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Remote control 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. PRESET/TUNING EDIT or 3 VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED FM/AM Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. 3 A AM 144O Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. PRESET/TUNING TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO Note If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. VCR PRESET/TUNING V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. TUNER TUNED EDIT A AM 144O 34 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 34 1/18/02, 6:44 PM TUNING Notes Presetting stations VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Lights up ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number and the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again. ADVANCED OPERATION Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 32 1 Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. PREPARATION You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see page 37). INTRODUCTION ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • When a station data is stored under a preset number, the frequency and reception band are also stored. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Manually presetting stations” on page 36. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations” on page 36. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO MEMORY A1:FM APPENDIX VCR CD VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. English 35 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 35 1/18/02, 6:44 PM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 4 You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. PRESET/TUNING STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED MEMORY 2,5 1 4 3 C3:AM 63O kHz 5 Tune in to a station. See page 34 for tuning instructions. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED A AM 63O kHz L R When tuned in to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of received station. 2 L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. MEMORY The station band and frequency appear on the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED C3:AM 63O kHz L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Flashes Notes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears and make sure that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A/B/C/D/E VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED MEMORY C :AM 63O kHz L R 36 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 36 1/18/02, 6:44 PM TUNING Tuning in to a preset station Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. INTRODUCTION You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E BASS EFFECT EDIT TREBLE SILENT – PHONES + – + STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES – + PREPARATION 2 1 + 2,4 1,3 1,3 EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU 1 2 MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT TEST DISPLAY RETURN Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Tuning in to a preset station” at left. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. AUDIO DISC SKIP 1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED MEMORY EDIT E1:FM 87.5 MHz SET MENU A/B/C/D/E or MENU Front panel Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET u / d on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. VCR SELECT MD/CD-R TUNER CD A5:FM 9O.6 MHz + Front panel DVD L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PRESET/TUNING MEMORY Remote control EDIT EDIT E1-A5 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER APPENDIX Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. VCR CD TUNED E1:FM 87.5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – D-TV/CBL VOLUME PRESET/TUNING or V-AUX TUNED MEMORY 4 PRESET/CH Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 A/B/C/D/E 2 VCR PRESET/TUNING BASIC OPERATION 1 REC MHz English 37 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 37 1/18/02, 6:45 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system by FM stations in many countries. RDS data contains various information such as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations. Description of RDS data This unit can receive, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data when receiving RDS broadcasting stations. ■ PS (Program Service name) mode: The name of the RDS station being received is displayed. ■ PTY (Program Type) mode: There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Pops ROCK M Rock M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music ■ RT (Radio Text) mode: Information about the program (such as the title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with under-bars. ■ CT (Clock Time) mode: The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks): Refer to following page. Changing the RDS mode The four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS data. When an RDS station is being received, PS, PTY, RT and/or CT mode indicators that correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station light up on the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/FREQ repeatedly to change the display mode among the RDS data offered by the transmitting station in the order shown below. RDS MODE/FREQ EON PTY mode RT mode CT mode RDS mode OFF Notes • When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up on the front panel display. If you press the button before the indicators light up on the front panel display, the mode cannot be changed. This is because this unit has not yet received all of the RDS data on the station. • RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • RDS data cannot sometimes be received under poor reception conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. Although the reception mode is changed to monaural by this operation, when you change the display to RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front panel display. 38 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 38 PS mode 1/18/02, 6:45 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS PTY SEEK function EON function 1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station being received or “NEWS” flashes on the front panel display. Note PTY SEEK MODE START Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the desired program type. The selected program type appears on the front panel display. PRESET/TUNING Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the “PTY HOLD” indicator lights up on the front panel display while searching for stations. PTY HOLD Lights up ■ To cancel this function 2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name appears on the front panel display. RDS MODE/FREQ EON • If a preset RDS station of the selected program type starts broadcasting, this unit will automatically switch from the program being currently received to that program. (EON indicator flashes.) • When broadcasting of the required program ends, the previously received station (or another program on the same station) is recalled. ■ To cancel this function Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights up on the front panel display. Press PTY SEEK MODE twice. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • If a station that is broadcasting a program of the required type is found, this unit stops at that station. • If the called station is not the desired one, press PTY SEEK START again. This unit begins searching for another station that is broadcasting a program of the same type. Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up on the front panel display. If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator lights up. ADVANCED OPERATION PTY SEEK MODE START 1 BASIC OPERATION 3 • This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a station is being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the front panel display. PREPARATION Flashes 2 This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station network. If you simply select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and switches from the station being currently received to the new station when the broadcasts starts. INTRODUCTION If you select the desired program type, this unit automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. APPENDIX English 39 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 39 1/18/02, 6:45 PM SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external component(s) connected to AC OUTLET(S). Canceling the sleep timer 1 The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. y Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. SLEEP • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. y • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM 1 STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 2 – MUTE 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD SLEEP MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP DSP PCM 3 SLEEP 12Omin VOLUME L R The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel display soon after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP DSP PCM CONCERT HALL VOLUME L R 40 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 40 1/18/02, 6:45 PM RECORDING 1 2 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING TREBLE A/B/C/D/E EDIT – + – + TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM 2 STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER + + TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software – MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT Turn on the power of this unit and all connected component. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP INPUT or Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ■ Timer playback/recording This unit can perform playback or recording with an external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operating instructions for the component and the timer to be used. Notes • Stored data, such as input source, will be reflected when playback or recording with the timer. • If you do not want any sound output when recording with a timer, turn the volume down. APPENDIX Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data (input source, volume level, set menu settings and so on) from being lost even if this unit is disconnected from the AC outlet. However, if the timer is turned off for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Front panel For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. BASIC OPERATION + TV VOL If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. PREPARATION BASS SILENT PHONES Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between the components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, VOLUME, “5 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not effect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot be recorded. • A given input source is not output to the same OUT (REC) channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not output to VCR OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. INTRODUCTION Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. English 41 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 41 1/18/02, 6:45 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the speaker mode setting. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. Adjusting the items on the SET MENU y • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. Items 1 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. Initial settings SPEAKER SET A CENTER B MAIN C REAR LR D BASS E MAIN Lv AMP VCR A + + + TV CH VOLUME TV VOL B – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 – MUTE LRG (large) LARGE LRG (large) BOTH Nrm (Normal) HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 6 ENTER EFFECT LEVEL 3,6 PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – 2 + SELECT TEST 2 LFE LEVEL SP/HP RETURN 0 dB 4,5 DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP 3 SP DLY TIME 0 ms 4 D. RANGE SP/HP MAX 5 L/R BALANCE 0 dB for L/R 6 HP TONE CTRL BASS/TRBL 0 dB 7 I/O ASSIGN A (component video input) Note • Some items require extra steps. 1 Press AMP. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. [A] DVD [B] D-TV/CBL B (optical output) (1) MD/CD-R C (optical input) (2) MD/CD-R (3) DVD (4) D-TV/CBL AMP SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust (1 to 10). PRESET/CH – SELECT + D (coaxial input) (5) CD 8 INPUT MODE AUTO 9 DISPLAY SET DIMMER • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. 0 4 y 10 MEM. GUARD OFF • In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the default setting is indicated in bold. Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the front panel display. Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub item. 42 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 42 1/18/02, 6:45 PM PRESET/CH – SELECT + PRESET/CH – SELECT + SET MENU 5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item. PRESET/CH – + SELECT 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) 6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu disappears or simply press one of the DSP program group buttons to exit SET MENU. PRESET/CH – SELECT + or HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 9 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide better dialog localization for several listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signal are directed to the main left and right speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. BASIC OPERATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. ■ 1A CENTER (center speaker mode) PREPARATION /DTS SUR. ENTERTAINMENT Notes • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, some items are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1D are not affected. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 43 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 43 1/18/02, 6:45 PM SET MENU ■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode) ■ 1D BASS (LFE/bass out mode) Choices: LARGE, SMALL LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals can be directed to both main left and right speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the main left and right channel signal is directed to the main left and right speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. ■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the rear left and right speakers. SML Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. BOTH The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Lowfrequency signals designated to the main channels in accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed to both main speakers and a subwoofer. Note • When you select MAIN for “1D BASS”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. ■ 1E MAIN Lv (main level mode) y • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you select NON for “1C REAR LR”. Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center, and rear (L/R) speakers with the main speakers because of unusually high-efficiency performance from the main speakers. Choices: Nrm (Normal), –10 dB Nrm Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 44 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 44 1/18/02, 6:45 PM SET MENU 2 LFE LEVEL Control range: SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted. 2 Press j to adjust the LFE level. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. 1 Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay of the center channel sounds. Center speaker image C R RR y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RL ADVANCED OPERATION C L BASIC OPERATION Control range: CENTER .......................... 0 to 5 ms Initial setting: CENTER .......................... 0 ms PREPARATION 1 Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sounds. This feature works when there is sound output from the center speaker, with a source like Dolby Digital or DTS, etc. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the main left and right speaker to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. 3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) APPENDIX English 45 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 45 1/18/02, 6:45 PM SET MENU 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital signals. Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum) MAX Select the “MAX” for feature films. STD Select the “STD” for general use. MIN Select the “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume levels. 7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more components. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks Choices: 5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and right speakers) [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL [B] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL ■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jack Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the main left and right speakers. Choices: Control range: 20 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R ■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks 1 Choices: Press i to decrease the output level for the main left speaker. Press j for the main right speaker. 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. Control range (dB): BASS ............... TRBL (treble) .. Initial setting: BASS ............... TRBL ............... –6 to +3 –6 to +3 0 dB 0 dB (1) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD (2) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD (3) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD (4) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD ■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jack Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD Notes • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. 46 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 46 1/18/02, 6:45 PM SET MENU 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) INTRODUCTION Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 25 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST PREPARATION AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the respective source. 9 DISPLAY SET BASIC OPERATION ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 10 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings on this unit. Choices: ON, OFF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select ON to protect the following features: • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers, and subwoofer levels • DSP program parameters Notes • When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. APPENDIX English 47 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 47 1/18/02, 6:45 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other component The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component to be controlled by pressing an input selector button. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM Å/ı buttons and input selector buttons POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT POWER TRANSMIT CODE SET VCR Press AMP to control this unit. STANDBY POWER A AMP B + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 MUTE /DTS SUR. 9 The buttons in the dotted lines (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, 6CH INPUT, VOLUME +/– and MUTE) function in any mode. Å/ı buttons and input selector buttons switch the control area for each component. * Å/ı buttons are to operate the other components that are not connected to this unit. Factory setting: Å...VCR ı...TV SYSTEM STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER POWER TV AV CD + VOLUME + TV VOL – +– TV CH MUTE – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU A/B/C/D/E – SELECT 3 4 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. DISPLAY RETURN ENTERTAINMENT 2 MONO MOVIE + TEST ROCK CONCERT 1 TV SPORTS MENU TITLE 9 ENTER EFFECT REC LEVEL AUDIO DISC SKIP PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Component control area You can control up to 9 different components. You can set up manufacturer code and program other remote control functions for each component (see page 50). 48 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 48 1/18/02, 6:45 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the manufacturer code The following table shows factory-set component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each component control. Component category (Library) Manufacturer CD CD YAMAHA 0005 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 0024 TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 0003 1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to select the component control for which you want to clear the manufacturer code. Code DVD YAMAHA 0098 – – – V-AUX – – – VCR – – – A – – – B – – – 2 POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER TV AV CD Press CODE SET by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Note 1 CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 1. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice, and the manufacturer code for the selected component is cleared. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to select the component you want to set up. y • You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering the code number “9990”. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TRANSMIT CODE SET 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four digit manufacturer’s code for the component to be used. Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES” at the end of this manual. HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 APPENDIX 5 /DTS SUR. BASIC OPERATION DVD D-TV/CBL SYSTEM STANDBY POWER PREPARATION Component control (buttons) ■ Clearing setup manufacturer code for the component control INTRODUCTION You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 9 component controls. Clearing setup manufacturer codes ENTER EFFECT The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. English Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. 49 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 49 1/18/02, 6:46 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components You can operate other components when you have set the manufacturer code for your component. Note, however, that some buttons may not operate your component. Once you select an input source, the remote control switches to the mode for operating the component. TRANSMIT CODE SET 1 2 SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 MUTE 7 5 /DTS SUR. 9 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER w EFFECT + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 8 LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE e A/B/C/D/E – 9 – 0 RETURN + SELECT TEST 5 6 DVD player VCR TV, digital/cable TV MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 CD player ENTERTAINMENT 4 DISPLAY AUDIO q DISC SKIP CD/MD recorder Tuner 1 AV POWER *1Power *1Power *3VCR power *1Power *1Power *1Power 2 TV POWER *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power 3 TV CH + *2TV channel up *2TV channel up TV channel up *2TV channel up *2TV channel up *2TV channel up TV CH – *2TV channel down *2TV channel down TV channel down *2TV channel down *2TV channel down *2TV channel down 4 TV VOL + *2TV volume up *2TV volume up TV volume up *2TV volume up *2TV volume up *2TV volume up TV VOL – *2TV volume down *2TV volume down TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV mute *2TV mute TV mute *2TV mute *2TV mute *2TV mute 5 TV MUTE 6 TV INPUT * TV input * TV input TV input * TV input * TV input *2TV input 7 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) 8 TITLE 9 PRESET/CH u PRESET/CH d 2 Up VCR channel up Preset up VCR channel down Preset down Left Right q REC/DISC SKIP 2 Down PRESET/CH i SELECT 2 Title PRESET/CH j 0 RETURN 2 Select Return Disc skip Rec *3VCR rec Disc skip Play Play *3VCR play Play Play e Search backward Search backward *3VCR search backward Search backward Search backward r Search forward Search forward *3VCR search forward Search forward Search forward Pause *3VCR pause w AUDIO d Pause Skip backward y Skip forward w ENTER e MENU r DISPLAY Rec (MD) Audio t a r REC Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward Skip forward Skip forward Stop Stop *3VCR stop Stop Stop Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index Display Display Menu A/B/C/D/E Display *1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has POWER button. *2 These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL or ı. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/CBL and ı areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/CBL area. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR. 50 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 50 1/18/02, 6:46 PM ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS 3 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center or rear left and right speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. PRESET/CH TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD D-TV/CBL A + + POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. AMP B HALL 9 1 ENTER EFFECT + PRESET/CH LEVEL TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST DISPLAY RETURN MUTE ROCK CONCERT REC ENTERTAINMENT – ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO 2 2 3 DISC SKIP Press AMP. AMP Notes • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C REAR LR” are set to NON, and “1D BASS” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • We recommend adjusting the speakers by following the steps described in “Using the test tone” on pages 21 and 22. ■ For 5ch Stereo (While playing a source) 2 + You can adjust the volume level for each channel in 5channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% • CT level (Center level) • RL level (Rear left level) • RR level (Rear right level) ADVANCED OPERATION Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display as follows: center, rear right, rear left and subwoofer. LEVEL TITLE Rear right speaker output level Rear left speaker output level 1 2 Select 5ch Stereo. 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the output level again. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Center speaker output level BASIC OPERATION 1 SELECT PREPARATION VCR STANDBY INTRODUCTION You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, rear left and right, and subwoofer) while listening to a source. APPENDIX Subwoofer output level y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing d / u. PRESET/CH – TITLE SELECT English LEVEL + 51 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 51 1/18/02, 6:46 PM ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs. Adjustment should be made with the remote control. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 The following table shows factory-set delay time. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Program CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT DISCO GAME CONCERT VIDEO TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE 70 mm SPECTACLE DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE Spectacle 6.1 70 mm SCI-FI Sci-Fi 6.1 DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE DGTL ADVENTURE DTS ADVENTURE Adventure 6.1 70 mm GENERAL DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL General 6.1 PRO LOGIC/NORMAL DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL Matrix 6.1 PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED Enhanced 6.1 PRO LOGIC Movie PRO LOGIC Music Preset value (ms) 45 30 15 26 36 21 10 69 23 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 15 5 5 5 20 5 5 5 15 5 A STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT AMP B 52 JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 ENTERTAINMENT 2 EFFECT + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT LEVEL PRESET/CH JAZZ CLUB A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST MUTE HALL SET MENU MENU TITLE ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO 3 4 DISC SKIP 1 Press AMP. AMP (While playing a source) 2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust the delay time. 3 Press u / d so that “DELAY” appears on the front panel display. PRESET/CH – 4 SELECT + DELAY Press j / i to adjust the delay time. Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay time. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the delay time again. 52 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) HALL 1/18/02, 6:46 PM ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC You can adjust the values of PRO LOGIC Music parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Adjustments should be made with the remote control. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM AV CD MD/CD-R DVD VCR D-TV/CBL A STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. AMP B HALL 9 1 ENTERTAINMENT 2 ENTER EFFECT + + + LEVEL PRESET/CH TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV VOL TV INPUT JAZZ CLUB 3 4 A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT TEST ROCK CONCERT DISPLAY RETURN MUTE HALL SET MENU MENU TITLE REC ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO • You cannot change parameter values when “10 MEM. GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. ■ PANORAMA 1 Press AMP. 2 Select PRO LOGIC AMP Function: Choices: 9 ■ DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). SELECT 0 Press u / d to select the parameter. – Press j / i to change the parameter value. + PRESET/CH – SELECT + Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. The larger the value, adjusts the center image towards the main left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from main left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. APPENDIX 5 SELECT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) PRESET/CH ADVANCED OPERATION /DTS SUR. Music. Turning the function on extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. BASIC OPERATION PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions DISC SKIP 3 PREPARATION POWER TV INTRODUCTION Note Changing parameter settings POWER MUSIC Repeat steps 3 and 4 above as necessary to change other parameters. English 53 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 53 1/18/02, 6:46 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound. The picture does not appear. Cause Remedy The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. — The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to either the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in the standby mode. 12 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 10, 11 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then start operating. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 10 – 16 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 23 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 24 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. — Digital signals which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of video jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO) for both the input and output. 54 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) Refer to page 54 1/18/02, 6:46 PM — 10, 11 14, 15 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn this unit back on. 12 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. — Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 10, 11 Incorrect setting of “5 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. 46 The sound effect is off. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on. 28 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. No sound from the center speaker. — Raise the level of the center speaker. 51 “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 43 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected (except for 5ch Stereo). Select another DSP program. — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with program 9. Select another DSP program. “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 44 “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 44 Poor bass reproduction. 26 – 33 APPENDIX The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). 51 — Select MAIN. 44 The speaker mode settings (main, center, or rear) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate position for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 43, 44 55 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 55 1/18/02, 6:46 PM English “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No sound from the subwoofer. 26 – 33 ADVANCED OPERATION The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. 26 – 33 BASIC OPERAIONT A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. PREPARATION No sound from the effect speakers. Refer to page INTRODUCTION Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Remedy TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. — The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set to ON. Set “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU to OFF. — This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — 56 — — 56 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 10 – 16 1/18/02, 6:46 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 17 There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — 35, 36 BASIC OPERAIONT AM Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. PREPARATION FM The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Refer to page INTRODUCTION FM stereo reception is noisy. Remedy ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Remote control The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy Refer to page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The manufacture code has not correctly set. Set the code correctly. 49 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. — — English Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. APPENDIX Wrong distance or angle. 57 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 57 1/18/02, 6:46 PM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Problem GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). ■ Dolby Digital ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ Matrix 6.1 The unit incorporates Matrix 6.1 decoder for Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel software that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to existing 5.1-channel format. (The rear center channel is created from rear left and right channels, and outputted from virtual rear center speaker.) With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over ” and “fly-around ” effects. ■ CINEMA DSP ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed using headphones. ■ Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround softwares. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. 58 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 58 D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 1/18/02, 6:46 PM GLOSSARY YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) ■ Component video signal Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits PREPARATION ■ S-video signal INTRODUCTION ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP BASIC OPERAIONT ADVANCED OPERATION When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 59 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 59 1/18/02, 6:46 PM SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 75 W [Other models] .................................................................... 65 W 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 80 W [Other models] .................................................................... 70 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • DIN Standard Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 110 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................... 95 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 95/115/140/160 W [Other models] ............................................... 90/110/130/150 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.06% • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output ............................................................. 0.34 V/560 Ω • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ OUTPUT SUBWOOFER .......................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL • Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) • Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz [Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz [China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] .................................................................... 210 W [Canada model] ...................................................... 210 W/260 VA [Other models] ..................................................................... 230 W Standby Mode ............................................................. max. 0.9 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models] .......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) ........................ 435 x 151 x 387 mm (17” x 5-15/16” x 15-1/8”) • Weight ................................................................... 10.0 kg (21.3 lbs) • Accessories ............................................................... Remote control Batteries 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter [U.K. model] A/V cable [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models] AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna *Specifications are subject to change without notice. • S-Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω • Component Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω PB/CB, PR/CR ............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB 60 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 60 1/18/02, 6:46 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS LISTE DER HERSTELLER-CODES LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER LISTA DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES LIJST MET FABRIKANTENCODES CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971 CLATRONIC 1181, 1331 CONCERTO 0791 CONDOR 0761 CONTEC 0151, 1171 CONTINENTAL EDISON 0571, 0651, 0901 CRAIG 1171 CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CROWN 2541 CTC CLATRONIC 0261 CXC 1171 DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511, 2611 DANSAI 0101 DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1691 DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1681 DEGRAAF 0451, 1351 DIXI 0991, 1511 DOMEOS 0101 DORIC 1031 DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611, 1641, 2101 DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621, 2111 DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2121, 2151 DYNATRON 0101 ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031 ELECTRO TECH 1511 ELEKTRONSKA 0771 ELMAN 0261, 1621 ELTA 1511 EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081, 1121, 1171, 1261, 1301 ERRES 0101 ETRON 1981 EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601, 0771, 1091, 1621, 2001 FENNER 0101, 1511 FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281, 2311, 2341 FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281 FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591, 1931, 2281 FILMNET 1141 FINLANDIA 0451, 2321 FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491, 0521, 0781, 0811, 0871, 1081, 1411, 1421, 1981, 2051, 2091, 2121, 2151, 2551 TV ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911, 1021, 1081 AIKO 0891 AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231, 1191, 1351, 1591, 1641, 1791, 1891, 1981 AKURA 1331 ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361 ALBIRAL 1971 AMSTRAD 1301, 1511 ANAM 1171 ARC EN CIEL 0571 ARCAM 0571, 0761 ARISTONA 0751 ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641 ASA 0411, 0451, 0521, 0781, 0871, 1021, 1081, 1421, 2051, 2091, 2151, 2551 ASTRA 1511 ATANTIC 0761 ATLANTIC 0761 ATORI 1511 AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511 AUSIND 0491, 1411 AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481, 0491, 0601, 0781, 0951, 1051, 1081, 1391, 1421 BAIRD 1101, 1351 BANG & OLUFSEN 1081 BASIC LINE 1321, 1331 BAUER 1451 BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121, 0131, 0221, 1561 BEKO 2491, 2501 BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241, 0251, 0471, 0741, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1821 BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081 BRITANNIA 0761 BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021, 1081 BSR 0391, 0691, 1621, 1901, 1981 BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331, 1641, 1741, 2131, 2151 BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611 CANDLE 0791 CENTURY 1021, 1081 CGE 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1531, 1611, 1621, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CITIZEN 0791 FIRST LINE FISHER 1981 0021, 0091, 0141, 0511, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2091 FORGESTONE 2281 FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761, 1081, 1451, 1541, 1981 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0021, 0431, 0451, 0591, 1411 FORTRESS 1081 FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981 FUJITSU 1261 FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171, 1181, 1261 FUTURETECH 1171 GBC 0021, 0141, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GEC 0451, 1101, 1281, 2321 GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1281, 1561 GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GENERAL TECHNIC 2681 GENEXXA 0451, 1331 GOLDSTAR 0591, 0601, 0761, 0791, 1371, 1491, 1511, 1561, 1621, 1641 GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371, 1641, 2301 GORENJE 0981, 1061 GRAETZ 0451 GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1111, 1351, 1981, 2321 GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1031, 1311, 1521, 1561, 1641 GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471, 0491, 0711, 0741, 1381, 2021, 2041, 2141, 2151 HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141, 0431, 0591, 1561 HANTAREX 0581 HEMMERMANN 0061 HIFIVOX 0331, 0571 HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451, 1261, 1351, 1511, 1641, 1981, 2011 HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031, 0081, 0141, 0291, 0331, 0341, 0451, 0601, 0631, 0701, 1281, 1561, 1601, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1861, 1871, 1881, 1891, 1941, 1981, 2051, 2321, 2341 HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511, 1621 IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1611, 1621, 2201, 2251, 2271 INGERSOL 1511 INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841, 1101, 1331, 1371, 1511, 2011 INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061, 0121, 0181, 0451, 0491, 1081, 1641, 1791, 1821, 1981, 2231 IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331, 1371, 1411, 1511, 2011 ISUKAI 1331 ITT 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 JVC (VICTOR) 0071, 0721, 1441, 1581, 1591, 1741, 1791 KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331 KAMOSONIC 0601 KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841, 1091, 1321, 1511, 1561, 2051 KAWASHO 0761 KENDO 0261 KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951, 1981 KONKA 2701 KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021, 1081, 1541 I 08V530RDS_code(GB) 1 1/18/02, 11:05 PM NECKERMANN KTV LENOIR LEYEO LIFETEC 0601, 1171 0601, 1511 1181 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581, 0611, 1081 LOGIC 1691, 2281 LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281 LOWEWE 0831 LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901 LUXMAN 0791 LUXMAN STEREO TUNER 0791 LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181, 0341, 0421, 0451, 0461, 0491, 0601, 0671, 1351, 1371, 1561, 1601, 1911, 1921, 1981 LYCO 1181 MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261, 0581, 0641, 0771, 1021, 1081, 1621, 1981 MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 2001 MANESTH 0101 MARANTZ 0101 MARELLI 1081 MARK 0101 MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601, 0691, 1101, 1151, 1241, 1271, 1301, 1511, 1561, 1681, 1691 MAXIMAL 0071, 1981 MCMICHAEL 1281 MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 MEMOREX 1511 METZ 0231, 0741, 1001, 1041, 1081, 1481, 2071, 2081 MGA 1231 MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491, 1381, 2141, 2151 MISTRAL 2281 MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231, 0661, 1191, 1201, 1231, 1671, 1691, 1741 MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581, 0591, 0761, 0771, 1371, 1431, 2031 MTC 0791 MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601, 0641, 0981, 1321, 1511 MURPHY 0451, 2091 MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031 N.E.I. 0101, 0961 NAD 1341 NEC 0141, 1711, 1721, 1731 NEDIATOR NICAMAGIC NIKKAI 0451, 0601, 0981, 1081, 1561, 1931, 1981, 2211, 2231, 2241 0101 0761 1101, 1331, 1641, 1701, 2011 NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591, 0641, 1381, 1411 NOGAMATIC 0571 NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431, 2461, 2791 NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 1051, 1131, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981 OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321, 0441, 1661 ONCEAS 0601 ONWA 1171 ORION 0061, 0391, 0691, 0851, 1211, 1241, 1251, 1301, 1481, 1511, 1681, 1691, 1981, 2371, 2421 OSAKA 2011 OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011 OSUME 0151 OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121, 0141, 0221, 0601, 1561, 1741, 1981 PAEL 0591, 1411 PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211, 0451, 0701, 1311, 1751, 1961, 2561, 2741 PANORAMIC 2351 PATHE MARCONI 0571 PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591, 1621, 1661, 1971 PAUSA 1511 PAUZA 1511 PERDIO 0891, 1101 PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1611, 1621, 1751, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2451, 2471 PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591, 0621, 0681, 0751, 0761, 1021, 1081, 1281, 2031, 2281, 2291, 2431, 2441, 2511, 2731 PHOENIX 1081 PHONOLA 0751, 1081 PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341, 1821 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0411, 0451, 0491, 0581, 1411 PRANDONI-PROMCE 0451, 0491, 0581 PRIMA PROFEX PROTECH QUELLE 0451 1981 0641, 1181, 1981 0041, 0061, 0121, 0221, 0231, 0391, 0491, 0521, 0601, 0781, 1371, 1381, 1411, 1421, 1641, 1681, 2051, 2091, 2141, 2151, 2201, 2211, 2231, 2241, 2251, 2271, 2551, 2571, 2581 REDIOMARELLI 0101, 0451, 0661, 0771, 1081 RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091 RADIOLA 2291 RANK 0481, 2151 RBM 2131, 2151 RBM (UK) 0481 REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641, 1981, 2331 REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081, 1031 REX 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 RFT 0991, 2511 ROADSTAR 1321, 1511 ROTEL 0151 SABA 0291, 0331, 0421, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 0581, 0651, 0731, 0931, 1021, 1071, 1081, 1131, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 SACCS 1971 SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161, 1241, 1301, 1511, 1671, 1681, 1691 SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061, 0071, 0341, 0451, 0671, 1291, 1351, 1521, 1561, 1601, 1641, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1981, 2321 SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581, 0641, 1091, 1371, 1411, 2001 SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841, 0981, 1101, 1181, 1371, 1511, 2011 SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1101, 1111, 1291, 1351, 1691, 1741, 2051, 2091, 2551 SBR 0681, 0751, 1281, 2281 SCHAUB LORENZ 0451 SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091, 0451, 0511, 0591, 0601, 0751, 1321, 1361, 1621, 1641, 2101, 2111, 2291 SCOTT 1171, 1261 SEG 0261, 0601, 0821, 0991 SEI 0641, 0691, 1081, 1301, 1481, 1981 II 08V530RDS_code(GB) 2 1/18/02, 11:05 PM SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SENTRA 1601 SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191, 1761, 1781 SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581, 0641, 1021, 1081, 1981 SICATEL 1971 SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231, 0451, 0741, 2011, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 SILVER 1181 SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021, 1081 SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101, 0261, 0391, 0641, 0691, 0851, 0941, 1021, 1081, 1241, 1301, 1321, 1481, 1631, 1981 SKANTIC 0451 SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011 SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511 SONY 0141, 0171, 1121, 1681, 1691, 2751 SOUNDESIGN 1171 SSS 1171 STERN 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SUNKAI 0691 SUPRA 0791 TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611, 1021, 1421, 1771, 1791, 2081 TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331, 1531 TASHIKO 0141 TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1681, 1691 TCM 2621, 2641, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 TECHNICS 1311 TECHWOOD 0791 TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261 TELE 1141 TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731, 1821 TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311, 0551, 0731, 1131, 1471, 1591, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1991, 2161, 2171, 2181, 2191, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2521, 2631 TELETECH 1511 TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401, 2411 TENSAI 1331, 2091 TEXET 0601 THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531, 0571, 0631, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1241, 1571, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2531 THORN 0741, 0861, 2091, 2251, 2271, 2281 THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281 TMK 0141, 0791, 1471 TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481, 1221, 1271, 1701, 1741, 1851, 2151, 2801, 2811 TRANS CONTINENS 0451 TRISTAR 2281 TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121 UHER 0431, 0451, 0481, 0491, 0511, 1311, 1541 ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591, 1021, 1081, 1981 UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051 UNIVOX 1971 VEGAVOX 0811 VEXA 0101, 1511 VIDEOTON 2481 VORTEC 0101, 0651 VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491, 1021, 1081 WALTHAM 0451 WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241 WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 1971, 1981, 2001 WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981 WEGA COLOR 1021 WELTBLICK 0101 WESTON 1621 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0101, 0261, 0431, 0591, 0761, 1401, 1541 YOKO 0601, 1511 ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 ZOPPAS 0451 SATELLITE TUNER AKAI ALBA AMSTRAD 1276 0826, 1276 0166, 0796, 1016, 1026, 1296 ANKARO 0476 AST 0406 ASTRA 0126 BARCOM 0476 BLAUPUNKT 0966 BMC SATELLITE 0106 BRITISH TELECOM 1276 BUSH 0826 BUSH (UK) 0956 CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276 CANAL PLUS (FRANCE) 1536 CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006 COLUMBUS 0616 CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426 DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866 DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476 DRAKE 1516 ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606, 0626, 0666, 0926, 0996, 1046, 1056, 1066, 1106 ELTA 1286 ELTA SAT 0146 EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246 FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186, 0296, 0846, 0956, 1306 FINLUX 0976 FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776 FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636, 1056 GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336 GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956, 0966 HIGH PERFORMANCE 0916 HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966 HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706, 0946 ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886 ITT 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 JEEMON 0146 JERROLD 0846, 0986 JOHANSSON 0246 JVC 1276 KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276, 0366 KOSMOS 0266 KYOSTAR 1036, 1086 LENG 0246 LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356 LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446, 0466, 0506, 1156 MACAB 0356 MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256, 0956 MEDION 1326, 1346 METZ 0966 MICROMAXX 1326, 1346 MITSUBISHI 0966 MORGANS 0596 MURATTO 0406 NEC 0286, 0316, 0766, 0786, 0836 NETWORK 0046 NIKKO 1136, 1146 CABLE TV CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476 CLYDE CABLEVISION 1426 FILMNET 1396, 1436 FRANCE TELECOM 1386 GEC 1426 JERROLD 1416 MOVIE TIME 1466 NSC 1466 PHILIPS 1386 PIONEER 0006 SAMSUNG 1496 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 1486, 1506 STARCOM 1416 STS 1466 TANDBERG 1366 TELE 1436 TELE +1 1436 TELESERVICE 1406, 1476 TUDI 1376 UNITED CABLE 1416 ZENITH 1406 NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156, 1166, 1336 NORSAT 0786 OTTO VERSAND 0966 PACE 0046, 0176, 0296, 0936, 0956, 1306, 1566, 1576 PACE MSS 0946 PACE SKY DIGITAL BOX (UK) 1526 PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706 PALSAT 0396 PALTEC 0706 PANASONIC 0806, 1306 PANSAT 1076 PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476, 0956, 1126, 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216, 1306, 1316 PROSAT 1176 PTT TELECOM 0306, 0896 QUELLE 0966 RADIX 1056 REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786 RFT 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216 SAGEM 1256, 1546 SAKURA 0566, 0816 SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136, 0446, 0456, 0486, 0496, 0576 SAMSUNG 0746, 0756 SAT 0406 SATCOM 0896 SATECO 0646 SECTOR 1266 SEDEA 1096 SENTRA 0416 SIEMENS 0896, 0966 SINTRACK 0906 SKYLAB 0476 SKYSCAN 0876 SONY 0736, 0946 STELLA 0306 STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036, 1086 STV 0636 TANDBERG 1116 TANDY 0916 TANTEC 0616 TATUNG 0516, 0546 TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526, 0556, 1056 TELECOM 0306 TELEMAX 0586 THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076, 0176, 0186, 0956 TOSHIBA 0946 TPS (FRANCE) 1546 TRIAD 0406 UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676, 0716, 0726 US ELECTRONICS 0886 VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076 VTECH 0436 WINERSAT 0246 WISI 0056, 0356, 0376, 0386, 0406, 0656, 1056, 1156 WOLSEY 0916 XCOM MULTIMEDIA 1556 XSAT (FRANCE) 1556 ZEHNDER 0266, 0406 ZENDER 0406 VCR AIWA AKAI 0042, 0352, 0432 0042, 0422, 0492, 0582, 0612, 0642, 0652, 0762, 0912 ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0972 AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452 ANITECH 0002 ANITSCH 1002 ASA 0012, 0052 AUDIOSONIC 0002 BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492 BANG & OLUFSEN 0042 BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812 BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252, 0462, 0672, 0992 BRIONVEGA 0032 BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0512, 0972 BUSH (UK) 0812 CAPEHART 0112 CGE 0042, 0432, 0762 CRAIG 0072, 0482 CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622 DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622 DANSAI 0012 DAYTRON 0112 DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432, 0942 DECCA (UK) 0052 DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432, 0532, 0602 DIXI 0442 DUAL 0042, 0632 DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532 DYNATECH 0432 DYNATRON 0012 ELBE 0122 ELIN 0072 EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202, 0432, 0512, 0522 ERRES 0012 FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722, 0852, 0902, 1012, 1022, 1082 FIDELITY 0432 FINLANDIA 0052, 0532 FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052, 0082, 0262, 0382, 0432, 0462, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0602, 0912 FIRST LINE 0002, 0912 FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532, 0542, 0572, 0592 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0012, 0052 FRONTECH 0112 FUNAI 0432 GBC 0002 GEC (UK) 0022, 0052 GELOSO 0002 GENERAL TECHNIC 1172 GOLDSTAR 0012, 0122, 0812, 0952 GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282, 0432, 0502 GOODMANS (UK) 0002 GRAETZ 0022, 0042 GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532, 0572 III 08V530RDS_code(GB) 3 1/18/02, 11:05 PM NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762, 1152 NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0402, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0792, 0832, 0842, 0872 OLYMPUS 0462 OPTONICA 0132, 0502 ORION 0162, 0202, 0312, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0982 OSAKA 0432 OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432 OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062, 0812 PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462, 0672, 0992, 1092, 1102, 1182 PENTAX 0172, 0602 PERDIO 0432 PHILCO 1062 PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092, 0152, 0182, 0362, 0372, 0382, 0472, 0502, 1072 PHONOLA 0052, 0152 PILOT 0012 PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372, 0472 PORTLAND 0112 PROLINE 0432 PYE 0052, 0152 QUARTZ 0572 QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042, 0052, 0062, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0462, 0522, 0942 RADIONETTE 0022 REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0502, 0532, 0572 RET 1072 REX 0042, 0742, 0782 RICOH 0952 SABA 0042, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0792, 0872 SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0972 SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812, 0822, 0912 SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622, 0652, 1192 SANSUI 0042, 0142 SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562, 0572 SBR 0052, 0152, 0182 SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042 SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052, 0072, 0432 SEG 0002, 0072 SEI-SINUDYNE 0442 SELECO 0042 SENTRA 0112 SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702 SHINTOM 0002 SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252, 0572 GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092, 0462, 0602, 0812, 0822 GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092, 0232, 0252, 0262, 0752, 0802 HANSEATIC 0052, 0812 HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922 HCM 0002 HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412, 0442, 0522 HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292, 0432, 0602, 0662, 0812, 1022 IMPERIAL 0072, 0432 INGERSOL 0442 INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072 INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172 INTERFUNK 0022, 0052 IRRADIO 0002, 0012 ITT 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 JENSEN 0042 JVC (VICTOR) 0042, 0102, 0142, 0272, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0902 KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812 KENDO 0492 KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572 LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172 LLOYD 0432 LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152 LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442 LUMA 0162 LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812 M ELECTRONIC 0432 MAGNADYNE 0052 MAGNASONIC 0572 MANESTH 0012 MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092, 0122, 0502 MARK 0012 MARTA 0012 MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0812, 0972 MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172 MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0532, 0572 METZ 0062, 0092, 0932 MGA 0912 MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172 MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252 MINOLTA 0172, 0602 MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142, 0912, 0922 MTC 0072, 0432 MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062, 0282, 0432 MURPHY 0432 N.E.I. 0012, 0052 NATIONAL 0462 NEC 0042, 0122, 0142 NECKERMANN 0032, 0042, 0052, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0522, 0572, 0762, 0812 NIKKAI 0112 NOBLIKO 0092 SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442, 0932 SONOKO 0282 SONY 0432, 0552, 0682, 0692, 0942, 0952, 0962, 1122, 1132 STS 0602 SUNKAI 0512 SUNSTAR 0432 SYLVANIA 0432, 0912 SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912 TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522, 0932 TASHIKO 0132, 0432 TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432, 0922 TCM 1142, 1162, 1172 TEAC 0042, 0432 TECHNICS 0462 TEKNIKA 0012, 0432 TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0882, 0892 TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052 TENOSAL 0002 THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0402, 0632, 0762 THORN 0042, 0902 THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222, 0302, 0712, 0722, 0742, 0762, 0852, 0862, 0872, 0902 TMK 0522 TONSAI 0002 TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912 TOTEVISION 0012, 0072 TRIUMPH 0922 UHER 0042, 0072 ULTRAVOX 0032 UNITECH 0072 VECTOR RESEARCH 0122 VIDEON 1162, 1172 WELTBLICK 0012 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0032 XENON 0162 YAMAHA 0042, 1202 YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072 DVD PLAYER AKAI DENON HITACHI JVC KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MITSUBISHI ONKYO PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER PROSCAN RCA SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TECHNICS THOMSON TOSHIBA YAMAHA ZENITH 0058 0188 0198 0088, 0178 0148 0128 0138 0068, 0128 0028 0098, 0128 0108, 0118 0158 0158 0078 0038 0018 0028 0168 0048, 0128 0008, 0028, 0098 0128 IV 08V530RDS_code(GB) 4 1/18/02, 11:05 PM LD PLAYER AIWA FUNAI HITACHI MAGNAVOX PANASONIC PIONEER RCA REALISTIC SAMSUNG SONY VICTOR YAMAHA 0137 0137 0047 0077 0027 0037 0067 0137 0017, 0087 0057, 0097, 0107, 0117 0127 0007 CD PLAYER ACCUPHASE ADC ADCOM AKAI 0315 0865 0785, 1015 0115, 0125, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0935, 1155 ARCAM 1875 ARCAM-ROTEL 0165 AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835 AUDIOSONIC 0155 AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245, 1765, 1915, 1935 BSR 0875 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 1075 CARRERA 0555, 0875 CARVER 0825, 1415 CYRUS-ROTEL 0205 DENON 0045, 0955, 1045, 1595, 1795, 1805 DUAL 1005 ELIN 0185 EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675 FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605, 0825, 1165, 1175 GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855, 0875, 0995, 1265, 1285, 1345, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 GOLDSTAR 0555, 1185, 1195, 1585 GRUNDIG 0175 HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495, 0565, 1135, 1145, 1155 HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685, 0945, 1005, 1015, 1225, 1545 INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015 ITT-NOKIA 0185 JVC (VICTOR) 0385, 0395, 0455, 0575, 0585 KARCHER 0485 KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145, 0215, 0595, 0675, 0695, 0705, 0715, 0925, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 KORTING 0175 LIFETEC 2015 LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645, 1655, 1665 LINN 0165, 1875 LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795, 0805, 1295, 1305, 1555, 1925 THOMSON 1005 TOSHIBA 0755, 0765 VECTOR RESEARCH 0555, 0865 YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085, 0345, 0615, 0655, 0815, 0835, 0895, 1815 LUXOR MAGNAVOX MARANTZ 0185, 1895, 1905 1865, 1875 0165, 0175, 0545, 0665, 1275, 1335, 1405, 1505, 1875, 1955 MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605 MCS 0535 MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005, 2015 MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1675 MGA 1125 MICROMAXX 2015 MISSION 0165, 1875 MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205 NAD 0135, 0255, 0285, 0295, 0305, 0345, 0755, 0765, 1315, 1325 NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565 NEC 0405, 0535, 0775, 0785 NECKERMAN 0155, 0225 NIKKO 0835, 1165 OCEANIC 0185 OKANO 0155, 0225 ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425, 1455, 1515 PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615, 1625 PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195, 1865, 1875 PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425, 0435, 0445, 0525, 0855, 1035, 1945 PROTON 0905, 1875 QUASAR 1075 RADIOLA 1845, 1855 RADIOTONE 0485 REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1575 ROTEL 1875 SABA 1005 SAE 1875 SALORA 0185 SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975, 0985, 1255, 1675, 1875 SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845, 0915 SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855 SCOTT 1285, 1675 SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025, 1115, 1275, 1635, 1785, 1815, 1825, 1835 SHERWOOD 1275, 1445 SIEMENS 1085 SIGNATURE 1155 SONY 0345, 0355, 0365, 0375, 0865, 1685, 1695, 1705, 1715, 1725, 1735, 1745 SYLVANIA 1875 TANDBERG 1885 TASHIKO 1525 TCM 1985, 2015 TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275, 1365, 1375, 1395, 1435, 1465, 1475 TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065, 1075, 1625 TELEFUNKEN 1005 THETA DIGITAL 1865 CD RECORDER/CD-RW HITACHI JVC MARANTZ PHILIPS PIONEER YAMAHA 0304 0334 0314, 0324 0274 0284, 0294 0244 MD RECORDER KENWOOD SHARP PIONEER SONY YAMAHA 0214 0264 0254 0224 0024, 0224, 0234 TAPE DECK AKAI DENON GRUNDIG HARMAN JVC KENWOOD KORTING LUXMAN MARANTZ NAD ONKYO PHILIPS PIONEER SONY YAMAHA 0124 0204 0134 0044 0194 0164 0134 0054, 0064, 0074, 0084 0134, 0144 0174 0184 0134, 0144, 0154 0034, 0114 0094, 0104 0004, 0014 V 08V530RDS_code(GB) 5 1/18/02, 11:05 PM GB RX-V530RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V530(GB)-cv1/4 1 RX-V530RDS AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia V874610 1/18/02, 8:44 PM